JP6747534B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, it performs a lottery with the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the change production and directing those of or in accordance with the lottery result, pachinko machine to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen is known. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed to enhance the interest of the game. ..

In such a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a notice effect related to the game is executed for the player.

JP, 2010-279560, A

With regard to this type of pachinko machine and the like , there has been a demand for a gaming machine with a further interest in the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable Rukoto improves interest in the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention , based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the determination means for performing the determination, and the identification information including at least a plurality of symbol strings for notifying the determination result by the determination means Display means for displaying, a stop symbol determination means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of symbol rows as the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the identification information on the display means. And a display control means for stopping and displaying the symbol determined by the stop symbol determining means after the dynamic display, and acquiring means for acquiring the determination information determined by the determining means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. A storage unit that stores the determination information acquired by the acquisition unit until the determination condition is satisfied, and a determination result based on the determination information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied. As a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, a dynamic determination mode for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes based on the determination result. A dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means before the determination condition is satisfied, based on the dynamic display mode determination means and the determination information determined by the preliminary determination means. Display mode determination means, and effect display means for causing the display means to display a specific effect display related to the stop symbol after the dynamic display executed immediately before, based on the start of the next dynamic display, A privilege effect executing means for executing a privilege effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, and the plurality of dynamic display modes are set in advance. The specified dynamic display mode is set, and when the effect display means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means, the specific dynamic display mode is set. all SANYO for displaying the specific effect display related to the previous dynamic display after the stop symbols from the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a mode, the specific effect display is performed before one After the dynamic display, after the dynamic display of the next identification information is started, the stop of the dynamic display executed one time before is executed in a state where the stop of the symbol is maintained. There is .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the determination means for performing the determination, and the display means for displaying the identification information including at least a plurality of symbol strings for notifying the determination result by the determination means. And, as the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, a stop symbol determination means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of symbol arrays, and the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means. Display control means for stopping and displaying the design determined by the stop design determination means later, and acquisition means for acquiring the determination information determined by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition means. A storage unit that stores the determination information acquired by the storage unit until the determination condition is satisfied, and a preliminary determination that determines the determination result based on the determination information stored in the storage unit, before the determination condition is satisfied. And a dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes based on the determination result as a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. And a pre-dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means before the determination condition is satisfied, based on the determination information determined by the pre-determination means. With the effect display means for causing the display means to display the specific effect display related to the stop symbol after the dynamic display executed immediately before on the basis of the start of the next dynamic display, and the effect display means A privilege effect executing means for executing a privilege effect when the content of the displayed specific effect display satisfies a predetermined condition, and the plurality of dynamic display modes include a predetermined specific dynamic When the display mode is set and the effect display means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means, the dynamic display is performed in the specific dynamic display mode. all SANYO for displaying the specific effect display associated with the previous dynamic display after the stop symbols than the identification information, the specific effect display was performed before one dynamic display of After that, even after the start period of the dynamic display of the next identification information, the stop of the stop symbol of the dynamic display executed immediately before is executed in a state of being stopped . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A)-(i) is a figure showing the kind of the 3rd design. (A) is the figure which showed typically the effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure showing a state in which the left and right symbols in the conversation notice variation pattern are stopped and displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a conversation is established in the conversation notice. , (C) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of the conversation notice effect. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of conversation notice production, (b) is a figure showing a reach display mode after conversation notice production in a conversation notice change pattern, and (c) is a figure showing. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the conversation in a conversation announcement becomes unsuccessful. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the content of ROM of MPU of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the conversation notice selection table of the character ROM of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the conversation notice data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a display conversation notice process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows a conversation notice exclusive stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart shown. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a time chart in the case where the pachinko machine conversation advance notice conversation in the second embodiment is established, and (b) is a case where the pachinko machine conversation advance notice conversation in the second embodiment is not established. It is a time chart. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a display mode in a state in which a variation before the variation in which the conversation announcement variation pattern of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment is performed is stopped, and FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a conversation with a pachinko machine's 10 conversation notice in a form is formed, and (c) shows a conversation with a pachinko machine 10's conversation notice in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case, (d) of the reduction display area displayed on the 3rd symbol display device, when the conversation notice of the pachinko machine 10 in a 2nd embodiment is displayed. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the conversation dummy advance notice process for the display. (A) is a time chart in the case where the pachinko machine conversation advance notice conversation in the third embodiment is established, and (b) is a case where the pachinko machine conversation advance notice conversation in the third embodiment is not established. It is a time chart. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart in case the conversation of the notice of conversation of a pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment is materialized. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the conversation notice production process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display production selection table 1 of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment typically, (b) is the display production selection table 2 of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice data table of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing 4 performed by MPU in a display control device in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the conversation announcement display process 2 for a display performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display production selection table 3 of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display production selection table 4 of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display conversation notice process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the modification of 5th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment, (c) is a frame button in the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode which alerts a person to press it. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode which notifies a player that conversation notice production of a pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment will be performed, and (b) is a pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode for notifying the player that the conversation advance notice effect is not executed, and (c) is a display mode when the conversation advance notice conversation of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment is not established. It is the figure which showed an example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control device of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows frame button input monitoring / production processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button press production process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment, (c) is the display mode of the conversation notice production of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is a time chart showing a case in which a conversation in a pachinko machine's conversation notice in the seventh embodiment is established, and (b) is a pachinko machine's conversation notice in a seventh embodiment. It is a time chart showing a case. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice pattern table (missing) of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice pattern table (hit) of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice production data patable (10 seconds) of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the production data pa table (8 seconds) typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice production data pa table (5 seconds) of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 6 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button press production process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 7 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command processing 3 performed by MPU in a display control device in an 8th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage” are used. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect, which are performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “town stage”→“the empty stage” is changed. ”→“Island stage”→“City center stage”→... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is changed to the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during a jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front face frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, and the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is rotated. The sphere is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to, and thus the sphere is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first when the ball passes through the second entrance 67). A lottery of 2 symbols) will be held. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of special symbols, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided, and as a value added after the big hit ends after the special game state, a game according to these big hit types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

Also, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display. It is shown not only by the device 37 but also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that a large number of balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily selected by lottery.

Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also displayed. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is selected by lottery, and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as special jackpot types.

When it becomes "big hit A" and "big hit B", it becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit), and after that, if it is "big hit A" as the added value after the big hit, it becomes the next big hit In the meantime, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, if it is "big hit B", after the big hit ends, 100 times, until the lottery is executed (until the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), the normal symbol is in a time saving state.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called special symbol probability state (during a change in the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is the state of the game that is easy to move to. On the other hand, if it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (time saving of the normal symbol) refers to a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol", which means that the probability of hitting ordinary symbol is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during the time saving. ..

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of the jackpot, and "the time reduction of the ordinary symbol is determined depending on the type of the jackpot. The period of being in the "state" is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. In addition, for example, instead of changing the period of "time saving state of the normal symbol" according to the type of jackpot, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or once. It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessory is released by hitting the ordinary pattern. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, "high probability state of the special symbol" and "time saving state of the normal symbol", but after the "high probability state of the special symbol" ends, "time saving state of the normal symbol" It may be configured such that

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power source or the like, the pachinko machine is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. After that, when it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and shifts to the "time saving state of the normal symbol".

The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by changing the lighting state to indicate whether or not the special symbol lottery that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is being performed, or the variation is displayed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is suspended up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times and is three times or less. Alternatively, it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. In addition, the LED 37a is configured such that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, blue) are different, and by combining the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the first symbol display device 37 performs variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols, left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIGS. 4(a) to 4(i), a design, which is a type of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached. More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively added to nine types of character designs such as octopus to form the main design.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, three symbol rows Z1 are set horizontally as a display area. In the symbol row Z1, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are scrolled vertically in ascending order. The combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1 is configured to notify the player of the big hit of the game (that the big hit game is started).

As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display screen, three symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1. In this embodiment, the effective line is only the symbol row Z1, but a plurality of effective lines (for example, three horizontal effective lines and two diagonal effective lines on the display screen) are set. You may.

In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are equivalent to "probability variation symbols", and when the 16R probability variation jackpot jackpot A occurs, they are the same. The combination of probability variation symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbols with an even number (2, 4, 6, 8) are equivalent to the "normal symbol", and when the jackpot B which is a 16R normal jackpot occurs, the same normal symbol combination is used. It is stopped.

Note that the manner of variable display of symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol row The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-described symbols, and for example, only the numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the second entrance 67 is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball inlet 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also lit up. It Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times, as in the case of the first entrance 64, and is not more than 3 times or not less than 5 times. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Moreover, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 big round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a while opening the opening 65a. It may be formed.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About read-ahead production>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, with respect to the reserved ball of the special symbol, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball inlet 64 and various counters have been acquired, various information (whether winning, stopping type) , Fluctuation pattern) is determined (look-ahead) in advance. When the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command (a big hit winning command or a non-winning winning command) including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether to execute the prefetching effect. Note that details of the prefetching effect will be omitted as they will be described later.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of main controller 110>
The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, as shown in FIG. 11, a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a normal symbol per random number table 202c, a jackpot variation pattern table 202d, and a deviation pattern table 202e. It is provided. In the present embodiment, the above is given as an example of the data table set in the ROM 202, but other data tables, programs and the like are also stored. The various data tables described above will be described in detail when describing the various counters below.

In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance opening. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, the sphere is left and right. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 11) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the jackpot random number. When it coincides with the value of the random number which is a jackpot set by the table 202a, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol. Further, this jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and when the probability is high that the jackpot of the special symbol is higher than the low probability (of the special symbol). It is divided into two types, that is, for a high probability state period) and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. In addition, the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols and the jackpot random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "7,107,282" is a big hit random number for low probability. It is stored in the table 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 3, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/100”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. It is stored. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 30, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/10”.

In the present embodiment, a big hit random number value stored in the big hit random number table 202a for low probability and a big hit random number value stored in the big hit random number table 202a for high probability, Random numbers for each jackpot are set so that they do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be apt to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 59" is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value), the random number value for determining the big hit type of the special symbol is set by the big hit type table 202b, and this table is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "reach out of front and rear" (eg 98,99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball storage in the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability time and a special symbol for low probability time, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the "front and rear outreach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear and front outreach" or "reach other than front and rear outreach". In the low probability state, when the probability of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is secured, the range of the random number value corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

In this stop type selection table, the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop types of "reach other than out-of-front/back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front-rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, since it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-front/rear reach" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern tables 202d and 202e storing random number values for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation pattern table, a big hit fluctuation pattern table 202d and a deviation pattern table 202e (see FIG. 11) are set. For example, the variation pattern table for detachment 202e defines various types of "off (for long time)", "off (for short time)", "off normal reach", "off super reach", and "off special reach". The jackpot variation pattern table 202d commonly used for jackpot A and jackpot B defines various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach". Here, as one of the deviation patterns for the deviation, the deviation conversation notice fluctuation pattern is set. In addition, a change pattern of the conversation notice is set as one of the various types of “shared super reach”. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

FIGS. 6A to 6C and FIGS. 7A to 7B are diagrams schematically showing an example of the deviation conversation notice variation pattern or the winning conversation notice variation pattern. After the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 6A, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the middle symbol is high speed. Alternatively, the state is changing at a low speed. As shown in FIG. 6A, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped with a different symbol (temporarily stopped in the non-reach state).

As shown in FIG. 6B, a comment is displayed by a balloon (comment window) from the character of the third symbol (the turtle character in the present embodiment) stopped at the left symbol. Further, after that, a comment of the conversation with respect to the comment of the left symbol is displayed by the balloon from the character of the third symbol (the dolphin character in the present embodiment) stopped in the right symbol. In this way, in the out-of-conversation notice advancement variation pattern or the winning conversation advancement variation pattern, the advance notice display for performing a conversation with the symbols temporarily stopped between the left symbol and the right symbol is executed. When the content of the conversation is established as shown in FIG. 6(b), as shown in FIG. 6(c), a production notice of whether or not to reach is executed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6B, a comment that the character of the right symbol "Is it good?" is established in response to a comment that "let's compete?" As a result, it indicates that the conversation has been established.

In addition, when the conversation is not established, as shown in FIG. 7C, "..." In which the character of the right symbol does not reply to the conversation of the character of the left symbol is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is shown that the conversation is not established because the character of the right symbol does not reply, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the character of the right symbol makes a comment “No!”. Also corresponds to the fact that the conversation was not established. Further, it is not limited to the contents described in the present embodiment, and it may be indicated that the conversation is not established when the contents of the conversation between the left symbol and the right symbol do not match.

When the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 6C, a display mode in which the character “turtle” having the left symbol and the character “shark” having the right symbol compete for the goal is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 7(a), when the character "turtle" of the left symbol reaches the goal earlier than the character "shark" of the right symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol as shown in FIG. 7(b). The third symbol of "turtle" is displayed on, and the reach state is set. That is, the conversation notice is a notice display mode for notifying the player whether or not the reach is reached. Then, in the out-of-conversation notice advancement variation pattern or the winning conversation advancement variation pattern, a predetermined variation display mode (dynamic display mode) such as normal reach or super reach is displayed.

In addition, if the conversation content is not established, or if the conversation content is established but the reach state is not reached due to the subsequent notice production, the predetermined middle symbol is stopped and the lottery result is out. You will be notified. In this way, the winning conversation change pattern is always configured to reach. Further, the out-of-conversation notice variation pattern is set for both the reach state and the non-reach state, and is configured to be different depending on the out-conversation notice pattern selected by the lottery.

In this way, when the conversation announcement is executed, the player can expect that the conversation will be established and a big hit. Therefore, the game can be played in the expectation that the variation in which the conversation notice is executed is started, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. It is acquired at the time of being stored and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol per random number table 202c. When it matches the value of the random number which is the hit set by, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table 202c, when the low probability of the normal symbol (the period of the normal state of the normal symbol), and the high probability that the normal symbol hits is higher than the low probability (normal symbol) (For a period that is a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), at the time of low probability of a normal symbol, there are 24 random number values that are the hits of the regular symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. A table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 9, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 26) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 8, a special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and a time saving medium. It has a counter 203e and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas from the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. When data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are execution areas. Is shifted (moved) to, and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) and the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired according to the starting prize, the original special symbol Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, various types obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each counter C1 to C3, each value of CS1) corresponding to the start winning. Predicting the information will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, the various information includes hit/fail, stop type, and variation pattern.

Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command and uses them as the prize information in the prize information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

In addition, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the winning/judgment determination result (pre-reading determination result) determined in S407 of the start winning processing (FIG. 21, S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 described later is also held. It is stored in each of the first to fourth areas.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), like the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. When data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is carried out, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 1 up to 4. They are added (see S404 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see FIG. 19, S205).

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see FIGS. 19, S206, 21, and S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and holds the variable display hold ball in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved number of balls command. In the transliteration mode, although not shown, one “●” is displayed for one reserved one on the third symbol display device 81.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the number of holding balls (standby number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see FIG. 22, S605).

When the sphere passes through either the right or left second entrance 67, if the value of this ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, a second random number per The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (FIG. 23, S705). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. No (FIG. 23, S703: No).

The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. In this time saving counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, the main control device 110 performs a lottery for special symbols, and each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a value according to the big hit type is set. To be done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many times the hour/shortening counter 203e has.

Specifically, when it is determined that the "big hit B" is set to 100 (see FIG. 19, S214). After that, until the value of the hour/hour counter 203e becomes 0, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol variation effect is completed (FIG. 19, S217).

When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, based on the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c for high probability time, the normal symbol While the lottery is performed, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0, the regular symbol lottery is performed on the basis of the random symbol per ordinary symbol 202c for low probability (see FIG. 22, S610, S611).

The other memory area 203z is an area where the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores other various flags and data necessary for controlling the pachinko machine 10.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). The display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display, is controlled. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 in which a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data are stored, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. To the device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. The ROM 222 stores a fluctuation pattern table in which fluctuation patterns are stored, and is determined by the main controller 110 based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 and various winning information commands. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be discriminable.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an effect counter 223e, and another memory area 223z. At least provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From the, various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) notified by the prize information command is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the four areas (first area to fourth area) which are vacant. To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol holding number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. Has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, and the special The number is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see FIG. 29, S1409). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to receiving the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storing. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving the display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere number for the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see FIG. 29, S1402), and when the fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is set to off (see FIG. 30, S1502). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is set to ON when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 29), and when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. Is set to off (see S1607 in FIG. 30).

The effect counter 223e is a counter value used for selecting a notice effect or the like. The effect counter 223e is a counter value that is incremented by 1 and updated each time the main processing performed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed, and is updated from an initial value of 0 to an upper limit value. It is repeatedly updated in the range up to 99. The effect counter 223d is a counter value that is set to 0 which is an initial value when the power is cut off.

The RAM 223 also has another storage area 223z for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display controller 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure. The same applies to the following), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Note that, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored in the character ROM 234.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages in succession, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. A second program storage area 234a1 to be stored, a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a conversation notice or conversation notice effect displayed in a conversation notice change pattern. It has at least a conversation notice data table 234a3 which is a data table for displaying.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs publicly known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and publicly reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is not corrected based on the erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data blocks. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined pointer of the program storage area 233a to move. It is set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) executed after the boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 or the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

Thereby, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is performed.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 31).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a in advance to display the power-on main image (in the present embodiment, The character being turned on) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control unit 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the "○" image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped. Display for a certain period.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, a power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the "○" and "x" images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 8) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols without numbers "0" to "9", corresponding to the main symbols consisting of the rear symbols of various characters shown in FIGS. 4(a) to (i). The image data to be displayed is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the device 114 stores it in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing among the sub areas provided from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area in which the image data should be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes the process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started and the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The ending effect informs the player of the end of the special game state, and also informs the player of the game value (ordinary symbol time saving period) given to the player after the jackpot is over, or a special symbol that is being held. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9”, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect is stored. As for the display data table which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing a plug-in or the like and a character used for various effects such as a boy image or a character is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since the display data table is fixed, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is defined. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect of the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbol. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the displayed time (high-speed fluctuation period). While the third symbol is displayed at high speed, since the third symbol is invisible to the player, during that time, the symbol offset information of the variable effect stop symbol that was previously performed is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13) is the data table The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

<Conversation notice data table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, details of the conversation notice selection table 234a3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the conversation notice selection table 234a3, among the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the types of symbols displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the selected conversation. It is selected by discriminating whether the advance notice change pattern is a change pattern in which conversation is established or a change pattern in which conversation is not established. In FIG. 14, the conversation notice selection table 234a3 is shown in a simplified manner. However, for each combination of symbols, the conversation notice displayed, and when the conversation is established, the subsequent conversation notice effect (FIG. 6(c ) And the display of FIG. 7A), the conversation notice data table (see FIG. 15) for setting the display is set in advance.

The conversation announcement data table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6(b) to 6(c) and FIG. 7(a), the conversation notice data table includes comment display of conversation notice and the conversation notice production shown in FIGS. 6(c) and 7(a). Each is set to an address corresponding to the display timing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the pointer is updated to the address 0064H, the turtle "3 symbols" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column of the third symbol display device 81 (temporary stop display of shaking fluctuation). Then, the display data is displayed in which the character of "Do you want to compete?" is displayed with the balloon from the character of the turtle. The (X, Y) coordinates shown in FIG. 15 are a simplified illustration of the data of the display position for displaying the left symbol and the comment. Although omitted in FIG. 15, similar display data is set to subsequent addresses as long as this display mode continues to be displayed. After that, when the pointer is updated to the address 008CH, in addition to the above-mentioned left symbol, the "7 symbol" of the dolphin is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the character of the character of the dolphin, "Good!" Is displayed. After that, as long as this display mode is displayed, similar display data is set in the subsequent addresses.

After that, as the display data transferred when the pointer is updated to the address 012CH, the display data of the conversation notice effect as shown in FIGS. 6C and 7A is set. In this conversation announcement production, display data in which characters and the like move and are displayed is set in order at addresses 012CH and thereafter.

This conversation notice data table is also set in the display data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 and transferred by the transfer data table described later to generate the drawing list (see FIG. 17). Similar to the display data table shown in FIG. 13, various data such as display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are also set in this conversation notice data table (see FIG. 15), but for the sake of simplicity, In this embodiment, the description is omitted.

In this way, since the conversation notice data table for displaying the conversation notice is set separately from the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice change pattern data table, the display data table corresponding to the change pattern is displayed. The number can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the conversation notice data table is set separately from the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the conversation notice data is displayed in the conversation notice variation pattern display data table. The display contents set in the table may also be set.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table and the conversation notice data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the transfer data table of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Among the image data, transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponds to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 16). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data that means is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 12).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

Note that the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table includes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, like the display data table and the conversation notice data table. In the example of 16, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is selected. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. At the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the character "Initial setting is in progress" which is a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main processing (see FIG. 31) executed (see FIG. 31, S1605). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see FIG. 41B, S3405).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see FIG. 33B, S2101). When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see FIG. 33(b), S2108) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 33B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 33(b), S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 42A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Indicates that there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see FIG. 42B, S3302). If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 43) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) in which the content of the image drawing instruction is described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thus, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. ), S2103), the pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 40) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time the pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later is displayed. (See FIG. 17), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing is always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 17, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, Design, 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, Reserved ball count symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. It should be noted that this drawing information also includes drawing information set based on the conversation notice data table. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method designated by that information according to the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Character (character 1, character 2,..., Hold ball number pattern 1, Hold ball number pattern 2,..., Display contents of conversation notice, error pattern (not shown) in this order, corresponding to each sprite Detailed information to be described is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side. As a result, when the drawing content based on the conversation announcement data table is set, it can be displayed in front of the drawing information set in the display data table corresponding to the conversation announcement variation pattern.

With such a configuration, even if the conversation notice fluctuation pattern is not displayed as the conversation notice display, by not setting the conversation notice data table, it is possible to show the player as if it were another variation pattern. It is possible to reduce the number of fluctuation patterns.

In this embodiment, the image corresponding to the conversation notice data table is set at the end of the drawing list to display the conversation notice display mode on the forefront side. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the image based on the data table is set, only the image based on the conversation notice data table may be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, the process of creating the drawing list can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter for counting the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. ) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see FIG. 38, S3008). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for every sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see FIG. 31, S1602) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see FIG. 43, S3517). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 43). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see FIG. 44, S3602).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information which has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 33B) is executed (see FIG. 44, S3602).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 18 to 26. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and thereafter. A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the passage through the gate through the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is in a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the special symbol is selected based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, and in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the process of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the special lottery result of this time is a special jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from among the two types of special symbol jackpots (the jackpot A and the jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. Is a big hit A, the setting related to the big hit A is executed (S213). In the setting related to the big hit A, the number of big hit rounds (16 rounds in this embodiment) and the probability variation big hit are set (S213). If it is a big hit B, the number of big hit rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time reductions (100 times in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S215), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process that is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 19) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and the execution area of the special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "outside the special symbol" lottery (judgment determination), the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is processing for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of a variable effect that is to be seen.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a are acquired. Yes (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a high probability state (during probability change) (S302). When in the high-probability gaming state (S302: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot random number table 202a for high-probability (S304).

In the process of S304, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired. Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with each of the 30 random value values stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability one by one. As described above, as the random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168. , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299" are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these hits are set. When the random numbers match with, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the game state is the low-probability game state (normal game state) (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301, and the low probability Based on the jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 3 stored in the big hit random number table 202a for low probability one by one. As the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, three "7,107,282" are set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that is a hit are the same. , It is determined that it is a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S304 or S305 determines whether or not it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S306), and when it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S306: Yes), The display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S307). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) is set as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown), the symbol fluctuation of normal reach, super reach, etc. Determine the variation pattern (variation time). The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by this fluctuation pattern table.

For example, as the variation patterns for disengagement, various types of "disengagement", "normal reach disassociation", "super reach disassociation", and "special reach disassociation" are defined. As the variation pattern for jackpot A, various "probable variation jackpot normal reach", various "probability variation jackpot super reach", various "probability variation jackpot special reach", and various variation patterns for jackpot B, "normal jackpot normal reach" , "Regular jackpot super reach" and "Regular jackpot special reach" are stipulated.

In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviating symbol.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined from a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. (Variation time) is determined.

When the process of S308 or the process of S310 is finished, next, a change pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S308 or the process of S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (stop type at the time of a big hit) is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 26). It The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21, a start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. Is a process for executing a process of holding the value indicated by each random number counter.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, after the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process. Each value is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Then, the process of S407 is executed.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in S406 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state, it is determined from the determination result of the reserved ball stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the determination of the success or failure is made. Performed in advance (pre-reading judgment of the judgment result). In the process of S407, not only the result of the judgment, but also the stop type and the variation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

In the process of S407, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S407: Yes), a jackpot winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set based on the stop type and the variation pattern (S408). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is a super reach, the jackpot winning command corresponding to it is set. On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the variation is out (S407: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is super reach (S409). In the process of S409, when it is determined that the variation pattern is super reach (S409: Yes), a miss reach prize command, which is a kind of prize information command, is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation pattern different from that of the super reach (S409: No), a deviation winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S411). The prize information command is configured so that the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can identify the type of variation pattern to be selected. That is, when the conversation announcement variation pattern is the variation pattern to be selected, the variation pattern can be identified.

The winning information command, when set, is output to the voice lamp controller 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64 are accompanied. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory which accompanies the first entrance 64 is made while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. If the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

When the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery for the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it enter the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10B).

In the process of S608, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and a low value. Based on the random symbol per regular symbol for probability 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the regular symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10B).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the ordinary symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance gate The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of position (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. The display (lighting display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) in the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. By the processing of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S625, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 18), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through-gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over the three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of times of variable display holding in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed by the payout emission control device 111, and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is set to ON (S904). If it is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process is S912. Move to. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No), there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally. Therefore, also in this case, the process proceeds to S912.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and is ready to start payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If so (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular process of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved symbol number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 19) and the start winning process (see FIG. 21) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, every time the main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20) ends, the first symbol display device End the variable display being executed in 37, in the display mode set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20) or the process of S309, the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, if the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S1008 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the startup process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, in the initialization process (S901), the stack pointer is By setting the value to the predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control Processing Executed by MPU 221 of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1318 (see FIG. 28) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 of FIG. 28), the power-off process of S1318 is executed. The power-off processing in progress flag is set to ON before execution of the power-off processing, and the power-off processing in-process flag is set to OFF after completion of the power off processing. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1202: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1318 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the startup process of this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1204, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

When the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to ON when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1317 of FIG. 28). In other words, the power-off flag is set to ON before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, and therefore, the process of S1208 is performed with the power-off flag set to ON only when the current startup process is performed. The case where the processing is started after the momentary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached when the power-off flag is set to OFF, because the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, the process of S1204 to S1206 is performed. This is the case where the processing of S1208 has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset (started without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1209 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204 when the processing of S1208 is reached from the processing of S1204 through the processing of S1206. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time has been executed (S1301), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1302 to S1310, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , It is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1312, the command determination process of S1311, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting regarding the variation effect without delay.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described below is set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1305 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on a reservation lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring/production process (S1307), whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is pressed is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to. In this processing, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame effect is pressed while the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including the information on the type of the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage in the rear surface image change command, the display controller 114 causes the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1308), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. .. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1317), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 28) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination processing (S1311), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area, analyzed, and the main controller 110 changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402).

After S1402 is executed, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403), and it is determined whether the variation pattern is one of the conversation notice variation patterns (S1405). When it is determined that it is the conversation advance notice variation pattern (S1404: Yes), the display conversation advance notice command is set (S1405). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the conversation announcement variation pattern (S1404: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). When the stop type command is received (S1406: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1407), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1408), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1406: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1409). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1409: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1410). Further, in the process of S1410, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1410 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, since the number of reserved balls is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) or when the special symbol is drawn, the start prize. Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the process of S1410 to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of detection of a start winning or special At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1410 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1409, when the number of reserved balls command is not received (S1409: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1419). ), and returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This change display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the change effect on the third symbol display device 81, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S1506 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1502), and then in the processing of S1404 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

In the process of S1505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1505). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1505: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1506), and then in the process of S1408 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1507).

In the process of S1508, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. Here, the stop type corresponding to the correct stop type (complete loss, front-back deviation reach, big hit (big hit A, big hit B), etc.) is notified to the display control device 114.

In the process of S1509, it is determined whether the received variation pattern command is a kind of conversation announcement variation pattern (S1509). When it is determined that the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern other than the conversation announcement variation pattern (S1509: No), the display control apparatus 114 is notified based on the stop type set in the process of S1508. A stop type command for display is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1511). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1509, when it is determined that the received variation pattern command is one of the conversation notice variation patterns (S1509: Yes), the display conversation notice exclusive stop type command is set (S1512). It should be noted that this display conversation notice exclusive stop type command is a command for instructing the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 to set the display of symbols in the conversation notice.

It should be noted that this display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is based on the contents of the display conversation notice command set in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) executed by the MPU 231 of the voice lamp control device 113. Is set. In detail, the content of the conversation notice is set by the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 14, and is predetermined when the process of S1405 is executed. Is determined (determined by acquiring the value of the effect counter 223e) and the conversation announcement variation pattern. When the conversation notice change pattern is the change pattern of the conversation notice being established, one of the winning notices of the conversation notice is determined by a lottery, and when the conversation notice is the change pattern of the not being established, the conversation notice is not established. Of these, one is decided by lottery. It should be noted that all the winning conversation change patterns are set such that the conversation notice is established. Then, a stop type command for exclusive use of display conversation notice corresponding to the left symbol and the right symbol of the set (selected) conversation notice is set.

<Control Processing Executed by MPU 231 of Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 43. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d operates at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions in the boot program from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1601), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S1701.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1702, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1702, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1703). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1601 in FIG. 31). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) (S1705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S1601), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 32, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1701 is a boot program for executing the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S1702. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1703 to S1705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, by this, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1701. Alternatively, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1702.

As a result, even when the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1703 to S1705 without performing the processes of S1701 and S1702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and thus reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot process time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1603). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1603, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller 237, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. When the power is turned on, it is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1604, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S1605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 41A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 42A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33(b)), the simple command determination processing is performed so that the power-on image (not shown) (power-on main image or power-on variation image) is drawn. (See FIG. 33B and S2108) and simple display setting processing (see FIG. 33B and S2109) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and therefore, it is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately check that the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. If it is through the device 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1605, the interrupt permission is set (S1606), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 17) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 33B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. In order to display on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2102) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination processing (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when it is determined to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37.

In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40.

After the display setting process is executed, next, the task process is executed (S2104). In this task processing, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 with respect to the image controller 237. Set the transfer instruction to be transferred. Details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2104), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105). The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As the counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2101: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2102) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command in the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing (S2205), first, a display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is set. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main controller 110 actually produces a variation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table. When instructed by, while receiving the variation effect according to the set display data table on the third symbol display device 81, to receive the next display variation pattern command from the main control device 110 Since another variable display is suddenly started, there is a fear that the player feels uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation time longer than the set display data table is actually set. Even when the main control device 110 has instructed a change effect having the following, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 outputs the next display pattern, as will be described later. Until the command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table set by the process of S2301 is turned on, and other display data tables The data table discrimination flag corresponding to is set to OFF (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2303, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can do.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f is set. Is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306).

After that, the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing. By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305 is updated, while the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301 is updated. The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2304 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the display data table, and it is determined that the variable effect in the display data table is completed. If so, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside, or completely out of contact) indicated by the display stop-type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33(b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2403).

Here, as described above, in the display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started, Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-described task process (S2105), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change several seconds or more apart from each other. Therefore, no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2401, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2402.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2206, when it is determined that the display stop type command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether the display conversation notice command is received (S2208). When it is determined that the display conversation notice command is received, the display conversation notice process is executed (S2209) and the process returns to S2201.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36(a), the display conversation notice process (S2209) will be described. FIG. 36(a) is a flowchart showing the display conversation notice process (S2209). In the display conversation notice process (FIG. 36A, S2209), a process of setting a notice display mode regarding conversation notice is executed.

In the display conversation notice process (FIG. 36(a), S2209), first, the conversation notice data table corresponding to the display conversation notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is selected (determined) from the conversation notice selection table 234a3. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S2501). A transfer data table corresponding to the set conversation announcement data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2503), time data is set to the clock counter 233h based on the set data table (S2504), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2505), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. In the process of S2208, when it is determined that the display conversation notice command is not received (S2208: No), it is determined whether the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. (S2210). If it is determined that the display conversation advance notice exclusive stop type command is received (S2210: Yes), the conversation advance notice exclusive stop type command process is executed (S2211) and the process of S2201 is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36(b), the conversation notice dedicated stop type command processing (S2211) will be described. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing for exclusive use of conversation notice. This conversation notice dedicated stop type command process (FIG. 36B, S2211) executes a process corresponding to the display conversation notice dedicated variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the conversation notice dedicated stop type command processing (FIG. 36(b), S2211), first, the stop type information (big hit A, jackpot B, front/rear outreach, reach other than front/rear reach, indicated by the display conversation advancement exclusive stop type command, A stop type table for exclusive use of conversation notice corresponding to any one of complete discontinuance is determined (S2601), and after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop type table for exclusive use of conversation notice The stop symbol is finally set (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2603).

Here, as described above, in the display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started, Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-described task process (S2105), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. In the process of S2210, if it is determined that the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is not received (S2210: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is an error command (S2212: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the error command process (S2213). This error command processing (S2213) is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command process (FIG. 37, S2213), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S2702), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2701, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S2702, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON in the process of S2702. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the occurrence status of the error.

Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2213, if it is determined that there is no error command (S2213: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to S2201.

In the processing of S2201 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), and each processing of S2202-S2219 is performed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2219 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), the simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 35(b)), which are the processing corresponding to the respective commands, while executing other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3001), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing (FIG. 40, S3005), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S2802). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3203), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is finished. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, and therefore the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3206), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, if a display data table is set, the address of the immediately preceding address in which the End information is written is stored. Since the drawing content is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3202: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

Here, returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinates of each sprite are specified. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on ( S3009).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalized display effect is to be produced. The data is set (S3010), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on in the ON state (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set in the. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is started. Until a predetermined time elapses after that, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is OFF instead of ON (S3009: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is ON (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3017: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the image of the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2105) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 41(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process is not completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237. Therefore, this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3301, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the processing proceeds to S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the unresident A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), the command determination process (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are performed instead of the simple command determination process and the simple display setting process. (See) is executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the image at the normal time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S3301: No in FIG. 41A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 42, S3303), first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the pointer updating process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier. The information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is acquired (S3501). Here, the information indicated by the pointer of the transfer data table of the display data table and the information of the advance notice transfer data table of the advance notice data table are respectively acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3406, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3506 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3506: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508),
In the process of S3517, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3517, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

Next, it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S3513: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (usually The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back face A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S2105). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image for one frame, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is set to the detail for each sprite. As the detailed drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is fixed. According to the sprite type, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In this embodiment, the notice display mode of the conversation notice is set so that the display order is the frontmost. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 6(b) to 6(c) and FIG. 7(a), the display mode of the conversation notice is in front of the design set in the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern and other characters. Is displayed. Furthermore, the conversation notice effect displayed when the conversation notice shown in FIG. 6C and FIG. 7A is established so as to hide the variation of the symbols set in the variation pattern display data table. Displayed on the front side. In the meantime, a temporary third symbol (special symbol) indicating that the special symbol (third symbol) is changing is shown by two "○"s at the lower left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. By alternately turning on and off the "○", the player is informed that the change is occurring.

In the display data table of the conversation notice variation pattern, the third symbol is set to be changed at low speed or high speed during this period, and when the conversation notice is not displayed, the variation of the symbol is displayed. It is composed.

With such a configuration, the conversation announcement variation pattern can be used as a normal variation pattern even when the conversation announcement is not executed. Therefore, the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced, and the data amount of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, by setting the drawing data of the conversation notice at the end of the drawing list, the conversation notice is displayed in front of the display content set in the variation pattern. However, not limited to this, when the drawing data of the conversation notice is set, the drawing data on the back side may not be set in the drawing list.

Further, the drawing content of the conversation notice in the present embodiment may be set in advance in the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice change pattern.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 33B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed every 20 milliseconds while the drawing processing of the image for one frame is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to select the conversation announcement change pattern, but the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 roughly determines the change pattern (for example, only the number of change seconds is changed). ), the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114 determines a detailed variation pattern such as a conversation announcement variation pattern by lottery based on the rough determination of the variation pattern of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in order to execute the conversation notice. However, it is a temporary stop display in which the left symbol and the right symbol are slightly swayed to be changed and displayed, and the symbol is displayed to the player. It has been stopped in the state that the symbol has not been confirmed and stopped. In the present embodiment, when the symbol is stopped and displayed without swinging and fluctuating, it is a case where the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed after the variation time predetermined in the variation pattern has elapsed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol for which the conversation notice is executed is assumed to be stopped in a different pattern (non-reach display mode) between the left symbol and the right symbol, but the invention is not limited to this and is displayed in the reach display mode. May be. In this case, if the conversation is established, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit (display mode that is likely to be displayed in the case of a big hit), or whether or not to be a big hit in the conversation notice production executed after the conversation is established. You may comprise so that the production|generation which alerts|reports may be performed.

<About the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 49. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the display mode of the conversation notice is set based on the conversation notice change pattern being selected by the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the last stop symbol of the variation of the special symbol (third symbol) is determined, and whether the conversation notice is executed at the start of the next variation. It is different from the first embodiment in that a determination is made. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About conversation announcement in the second embodiment>
The outline of the conversation announcement in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b) are time charts showing fluctuations when the conversation announcement is established and when it is not established.

FIG. 44A is a time chart showing a case where the conversation notice is established and the conversation notice effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 1 that has started fluctuation first is a fluctuation pattern in which the judgment result is wrong and is stopped with a stop symbol as shown in FIG. 45(a). In the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 1, the third symbol is displayed at the low speed on the third symbol display device 81 at a low speed. The symbol low speed fluctuation period: T, and then the high speed fluctuation period of the third symbol is displayed at the high speed. After that, again, after the symbol low-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 45(a), after three symbols are temporarily stopped in the symbol row Z1, the symbol temporary stop period (swing fluctuation period) is displayed which is slightly rocked up and down. ), the fixed stop. After that, during the fixed stop period (in this embodiment, 1 second), after the fixed stop, the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol) of the fluctuation 2 corresponding to the next suspended is started. In this case, the stop pattern of the variation 1 is determined, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to give the conversation notice. If the symbol is capable of giving the conversation notice, the variation pattern of the variation 2 is the conversation notice. It is determined whether or not there is a change pattern that may be accepted (a change pattern of a pertinent conversation notice or a change pattern of the out-of-conversation notice change patterns set to establish conversation notice), and the conversation notice data table is set.

Since the variation 2 shown in FIG. 44(a) is a variation pattern in which the conversation notice is established, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 45(b) is displayed over the symbol low-speed variation period and the symbol high-speed variation period. The conversation notice effect shown in FIGS. 6C and 7A is displayed over the subsequent symbol high-speed fluctuation period and symbol low-speed fluctuation period.

After that, it is notified that it will reach, and after the display mode of the super reach set in the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 2 is displayed, the symbol is temporarily stopped by the combination of symbols showing the lottery result. After that, after a temporary stop period of the symbol, it is definitely stopped.

As shown in FIG. 45(b), in the conversation announcement in the second embodiment, when the fluctuation start timing of fluctuation 2 is reached, the display area of the third symbol is reduced as shown in FIG. 45(b). It is formed in the display area 81s, and in the reduced display area 81s, the third symbol is reduced and scroll-displayed from the top to the bottom as shown in FIG. 45(d). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize that the variable display of the third symbol is being performed. Further, since the size of the reduced display area 81s is set to be sufficiently smaller than the display area in which the conversation notice is displayed (in this embodiment, about 1/16), it is possible to prevent the display mode of the conversation notice from being disturbed. Can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area 81s is assumed to be displayed by reducing the enlargement ratio of the character in the normal state according to the display setting of the display data table, but the reduced symbol data May be set for exclusive use, and the design may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load required for the reduction processing, and reduce the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area 81s is the scroll display from the upper side to the lower side as in the normal time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is different from the normal time such as right to left. A scroll display or a blinking design (the brightness of the design is raised or lowered or the transparency of the design is varied) may be displayed to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, by blinking the symbols instead of scrolling them, it is possible to easily inform that the symbols are changing even in a small display area.

FIG. 44(b) is a time chart showing changes when the conversation announcement is not established. The variation 1 is the same as the variation 1 shown in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 44(b), when the fluctuation of fluctuation 2 is started, the stop symbol of fluctuation 1 is determined, and if the stop symbol is capable of executing the conversation announcement, the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 2 is determined and the conversation It is a time chart when it is discriminated that it is a fluctuation pattern in which a notice is not established. In this case, after the conversation notice shown in FIG. 45(c) is displayed in the symbol low speed fluctuation period, the display mode in which the third symbol is variably displayed at the high speed set in the display data table of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 2 Is displayed. Then, after a temporary stop display with a combination of symbols showing the lottery result, after a temporary stop period of the symbols, the fixed stop is performed.

With this configuration, even if there is a variation in the lottery result that is out of the range, if the stop symbol is a combination in which a conversation notice is given, the conversation notice is executed and a big hit occurs in the next variation. You can play the game with the expectation that it may be. Therefore, the player can expect to have a stop symbol that can be announced as a conversation, and can enjoy the game with the expectation of a big hit even if the lottery result is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment>
FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment. In the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, a stop symbol history flag 233m is added to the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The stop symbol history flag 233m is a flag indicating that the stop symbol capable of executing the conversation notice is displayed in the previous variation. In addition, the previous variation indicates a variation of the special symbol one before the variation that is the variation start.

In this stop symbol history flag 233m, in the process of the stop type command process 2 (FIG. 49(a), S2215) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed can announce the conversation. If it is determined to be ON, it is set to ON in the process of S2411. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the process of S2223 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. In the initial setting executed when the power is turned on, the stop symbol history flag 233m is a flag that is set to off.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
In the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the process of the variable display setting process (S1312) of the main process (see FIG. 28) is the variable display setting process 2 in the first embodiment. It is changed to the processing of (FIG. 47, S1320). For other processes, the same processes as the processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment are executed.

With reference to FIG. 47, the variable display setting process 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1320). In this variable display setting process 2 (S1320), the processes of S1509 and S1512 are deleted from the variable display setting process (S1312 of FIG. 30,) in the first embodiment, and the processes of S1701 to S1713 are The same processes as the respective processes of S1501 to S1508 and S1511 of the variable display setting process (S1312) in the embodiment are executed.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment>
In the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment, a V interrupt process (FIG. 33(b)) is performed in contrast to the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment. The command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102), which is one of the processes, is changed to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110). For other processing, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

The command determination processing 2 (S2110) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S2110). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) in the second embodiment, each process of S2220 to S2222 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment, and the process of S2207 is performed. Is changed to the process of S2215, and the processes of S2208 to S2211 are deleted. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the process of S2204 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110), if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 whether there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the stop symbol history flag 233m is turned on. It is determined whether there is any (S2220). That is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation is a stop symbol for which the conversation notice can be executed. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol that can be announced in advance of conversation is set to a stop symbol other than the reach symbol in which the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol. Not limited to this, only a specific stop symbol (for example, a turtle on the left symbol, a shark on the right symbol, etc.) may be set as a conversation-predictable symbol, or if a symbol other than the reach symbol is predetermined, In the case where the lottery is executed and it is a win (when the counter is acquired and the value is a predetermined value), the conversation notice may be determined as an executable symbol.

In the process of S2220, when it is determined that the stop symbol history flag 233m is on (S2220: Yes), the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display received this time is a variation pattern with which the conversation notice can be established. Is determined (S2221). Here, the variation patterns in which the conversation notice can be established are the winning conversation notice variation pattern and the deviation conversation notice variation pattern set when the conversation notice is established. The deviation conversation notice variation pattern set when the conversation notice is established is always set to the reach variation pattern. As a result, even if the lottery result is missed, it is possible to show the variation mode of the reach to the player without fail by establishing the conversation notice, and it is possible to give the player an expectation for the jackpot.

When it is determined that the conversation advance notice is a feasible variation pattern (S2221: Yes), the display conversation advance notice process is executed (S2209). This display conversation notice process (FIG. 36(a), S2209) is almost the same as the process already described in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Correspondingly, the setting of the conversation notice that the conversation notice is established is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2221, if it is determined that the conversational announcement is a variation pattern other than the feasible variation pattern (S2221: No), the display conversation dummy announcement process is executed (S2222).

Here, the display conversation dummy notice process (S2222) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart showing the display dummy dummy notice process (S2222). In the display conversation dummy notice process (S2222), a process of setting display mode data in which the content of the conversation notice is not established by the conversation notice of the symbol corresponding to the stop pattern of the previous variation is executed.

In this display conversation dummy notice process (S2222), first, the conversation dummy notice data table corresponding to the stop pattern of the previous fluctuation is set (S2311). Note that this conversation dummy notice data table has the same configuration as the conversation notice data table of the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 45(c), the conversation notice is not established.

The transfer data table corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set in the process of S2311 is determined (selected) and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2312). Then, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set by the processing of S2311 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other conversation dummy notice data tables are set off (S2313). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2313, it is easy to determine which notice content the conversation dummy notice data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2311, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2314), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S2315). After that, the display conversation dummy notice process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the processes of S2209 and S2222 are executed, or in the process of S2220, when it is determined that the stop symbol history flag 233m is off (S2220: No), the process of S2223 is executed.

In the process of S2223, the stop symbol history flag 233m is set to OFF (S2223). After that, the variation pattern command processing is executed (S2205). This fluctuation pattern command processing (FIG. 35(a), S2205) is the same processing as the processing already described in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the processing of S2205 is executed, the processing of S2201 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the display stop type command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 ( S2206). When it is determined that the display stop type command is received (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process 2 is executed (S2215).

Here, the stop type command processing 2 (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing 2 (S2215). The stop type command process 2 (S2215) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment is different from the stop type command process (FIG. 35(b), S2207) according to the first embodiment in steps S2410 to S2411. Each process has been added. Each processing of S2401 to S2403 is the same as the stop type command processing (FIG. 35B, S2207) of the first embodiment.

After the processing of S2402 is executed, the processing of S2410 is executed. In the process of S2410, it is determined whether or not the combination of the stop symbols that is stop-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a combination in which a conversation notice can be announced (S2410). When it is determined that the combination allows the conversation to be announced (S2410: Yes), the stop symbol history flag 233m is set to ON (S2411). On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop symbol is a combination in which conversation announcement is not possible (S2410), the process of S2403 is executed.

In this way, when the symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not to execute the conversation notice in the next change by determining whether or not the stop symbol is the stop symbol for which the conversation notice can be given. ..

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the conversation advance notice is executed by using the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating that the lottery result is out of order. , It is possible to make the player expect that the conversation notice will be executed. Further, when the content of the conversation notice is established, the player can expect to win the jackpot. Therefore, the player can expect that the content of the conversation notice will be established and become a jackpot across two fluctuations. it can.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the conversation notice when the conversation notice change pattern is selected. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in that, at the start of a change, the next change is pre-read, and if the change pattern is a conversation notice, the conversation notice is set. The same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 51, the main processing (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described.

In the main processing (see FIG. 51) in the third embodiment, the command determination processing (FIG. 29, S1311) is changed to the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) in comparison with the main processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 3 (S1330). For other processing, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

The command determination processing 2 (S1420) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S1420). The processes of S1421 to S1423, S1425 to S1430, and S1433 of the command determination process 2 (S1420) in the second embodiment are the same as S1401 to S1403, S1405 to S1410 of the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1419 is executed. Further, in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1423 to S1424 and S1431 to S1432 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. ing.

After the processing of S1423 is executed, the processing of S1424 is executed. In the process of S1424, the lottery result of the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received this time is out of order, and the variation to be started next (variation for the lottery stored in the holding first area) is the conversation. It is determined whether or not it is the advance notice variation pattern (S1424). Here, the type of the variation pattern of the variation to be started next is determined based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a based on the winning information command output from the main controller 110. ..

In the process of S1424, if it is determined that the current variation is out of order and the variation pattern of the next variation is the conversation announcement variation pattern (S1424: Yes), the display conversation announcement command is set (S1425). ..

In the display conversation notice command set here, if the conversation notice change pattern of the next change is a change pattern of the conversation notice being established, a command indicating that the conversation notice is showing that the conversation notice is being established is set. It should be noted that by setting the display conversation notice command indicating that the conversation notice has been established, a notice display as shown in FIG. 45B is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if the next variation of the conversation notice variation pattern is the conversation notice variation pattern in which the conversation notice is not established, the display conversation notice command indicating that the conversation notice is not established is set. By setting the display conversation notice command indicating that the conversation notice is not established, the notice display as shown in FIG. 45C is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that FIGS. 45(b) and 45(c) are displayed with the fluctuation 2 in the second embodiment, but are shown in FIGS. 50(a) and 50(b) in the third embodiment. In this way, it is displayed from the fluctuation temporary stop of fluctuation 1 to the start of fluctuation of the next fluctuation.

Note that, unlike the first embodiment, the conversation notice display is only the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 45(b) and 45(c). The conversation notice effect displayed when the conversation notice is established (see FIG. 6C and FIG. 7A) is, as shown in FIG. 50A, from the symbol low-speed variation period of variation 2 to the symbol high-speed variation period. It is displayed by setting the conversation announcement command for display indicating the execution of the conversation announcement effect at the start of the variation 2 during the period until the symbol low speed variation period ends. In the third embodiment, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a data table of conversation notice and a conversation notice effect are separately set as the conversation notice data table.

In the present embodiment, the conversation advance notice is set for each of the variation 1 and the variation 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the conversation advance notice data table is similar to that of the first embodiment, the conversation advance notice and the conversation advance notice effect. Is displayed by setting one conversation notice data table, in the notice display when the conversation notice is established, in the period from the fluctuation temporary stop of fluctuation 1 to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period of fluctuation 2. You may comprise so that it may be displayed over. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the conversation notice data table.

On the other hand, in the process of S1429, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1429: No), it is determined whether the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1431). When it is determined that the winning information command is received (S1431: Yes), the information indicated by the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the reserved ball (S1432). The winning information command output from the main control device 110 is configured to be able to determine the type of the variation pattern selected at the start of variation, as a result of the hit/miss determination.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning information command is configured to be able to determine the win/no win determination result and the type of the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation. However, the winning information command is not limited to this, the win/win judgment result, the conversation notice fluctuation pattern It may be configured to be able to determine some information of the variation pattern type such as whether or not. With this configuration, the winning information command can be simplified. Therefore, the control load required for the command determination process can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the variable display setting process 3 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 (S1330). The variable display setting process 3 (FIG. 53, S1330) in the third embodiment is different from the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment in that each process from S1509 to S1512 is from S1513 to S1515. It has been changed to each process. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

After the processing of S1508 is executed, the processing of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether or not the display conversation notice command is set in S1425 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) (S1513). When it is determined that the display conversation notice command is not set (S1513: No), the display stop type command is set (S1514). On the other hand, if it is determined that the display conversation notice command is set (S1513: Yes), the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is set (S1515).

As described above, in the variable display setting process 3 (FIG. 53, S1330) in the third embodiment, when the display conversation notice command is set, the stop symbol is set by setting the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command. It is possible to match the displayed conversation announcement command. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the content of the conversation notice does not match the stop pattern.

Next, the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2220) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern command processing 2 (S2220). The variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220) in the third embodiment is obtained by adding the processes of S2310 and S2311 to the variation pattern command process (FIG. 35, S2205) in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

After the processing of S2306 is executed, the processing of S2310 is executed. In the process of S2310, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation starts is the conversation notification fluctuation pattern set when the conversation notification is established (S2310). When it is determined that the conversation notice variation pattern is set when the conversation notice is established (S2310: Yes), the conversation notice data table of the conversation notice effect corresponding to the conversation notice displayed in the previous change is displayed as the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2311). In the present embodiment, although omitted, similar to each processing from S2302 to S2305, processing such as setting of a rolling data table corresponding to the set conversation notice data table and initialization of a pointer is executed. To be done.

With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the conversation notice data table corresponding to the conversation notice effect is set at the start of the change of variation 2, so that the symbol low-speed change period from the start of the change The conversation notice production is displayed during the period until is completed. Therefore, even if the variation 1 of the previous variation is a variation of the lottery result, the player can enjoy the conversation notice by the symbol displayed when the variation is stopped, and the content of the conversation notice is established. If so, it can be enjoyed expecting a conversation announcement production to see if the reach will be established by the next change. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player over a plurality of fluctuations and prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, in the third embodiment, the conversation notice effect displayed when the conversation notice is established is displayed from the start of variation until the end of the symbol low-speed variation period, as shown in FIG. 45(a). Since it is set, when the reach is established, the reach effect can be shown to the player after notifying that the reach will be reached in the conversation notice effect. In addition, when the reach is not reached, it is a temporary change stop, and the player can be notified that the lottery result is out of order.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the conversation notice is executed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice change pattern has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the change pattern for the next change is pre-read and determined, and if it is super reach, the notice display of the conversation notice is executed. This is different from the first embodiment. It should be noted that the third embodiment differs from the third embodiment in that it does not have a conversation advance notice variation pattern. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a time chart when a conversation announcement is executed in the fourth embodiment. The conversation advance notice time chart in the third embodiment means that the conversation advance notice effect executed when the conversation advance notice is established is executed only for a predetermined period from the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation 2 to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period. The difference is that. That is, in the third embodiment, since the conversation notice variation pattern is exclusively set, the conversation notice variation pattern is set in advance in accordance with the period of the conversation notice effect, and the period from the start of variation to the end of the symbol low-speed variation period is set. In contrast to the setting, in the fourth embodiment, since it is a normal super reach fluctuation pattern, the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period is different depending on the fluctuation pattern. .. Therefore, after all the conversation notice effects have been displayed, in the period in which the symbols are changing (before the reach state is reached), the display mode in which the reach is reached after the normal change is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display time of the conversation notice effect is not configured to be matched with the period from the start of the variation of the variation pattern of the super reach to the end of the symbol low speed variation period, but the invention is not limited to this. A plurality of conversation notice effects having different display times may be set, and the conversation notice effect may be selected in accordance with the selected super reach display mode.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, a conversation advance notice effect counter 223f is added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The conversation notice production counter 223f is a counter that indicates how many times the special symbol starts changing after the conversation notice is set. The conversation advance notice effect counter 223f is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, set to 1 in the process of S1446 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440), and then set to the variable display setting process 4 (FIG. 59, S1340) is incremented by 1 in the process of S1521. On the other hand, in the process of S1524, the initial value 0 is reset.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 57, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main processing (see FIG. 57) in the fourth embodiment, the command determination processing (FIG. 29, S1311) is different from the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) in the main processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. ), the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 4 (FIG. 59, S1340). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the command determination processing 3 (S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S1440). The respective processes of S1441 to S1443, S1447 to S1451 and S1454 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) in the fourth embodiment are S1401 to S1403 and S1406 of the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. The processes similar to S1410 and S1419 are executed. The processing of S1452 to S1453 of the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) of the fourth embodiment is the same as the processing of S1431 to S1432 of the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) of the third embodiment. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

After the processing of S1443 of the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) in the fourth embodiment is executed, the processing of S1444 is executed. In the process of S1444, it is determined whether or not the received lottery result of the variation pattern of this time is out, and the type of the variation pattern of the next variation is super reach (S1444). If the lottery result of the current variation pattern is out of alignment and the variation pattern of the next variation is determined to be super-reach (S1444: Yes), the display conversation notice command is set (S1445). The value of the conversation notice presentation counter 223f is set to 1 (S1446). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern or the next variation pattern is a variation pattern other than the super reach (S1444: No), this process is ended.

In this way, when the variation of the super reach is next varied, if it is judged from the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, if the lottery result of the variation which is changed this time is out, the conversation notice is displayed. Is displayed at the time of temporary stop of fluctuation of fluctuation 1, as shown in FIG. Note that the conversation notice displayed here is a conversation notice only for conversation as shown in FIG. Therefore, the player can early determine that the super-reach fluctuation will be started next when the conversation announcement is executed. Therefore, even if the variation display of the missed lottery result is displayed, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the conversation notice will be executed.

In the present embodiment, by giving a conversation announcement on condition that the next variation is super reach, it is not necessary to set a variation pattern dedicated to the conversation announcement, and the number of variation patterns can be reduced.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, if the variation of this time is out and the variation pattern of the next variation is super-reach, the conversation notice is executed. However, the present variation is not limited to this, and the next variation of If the variation pattern is super reach, a lottery with a predetermined lottery probability may be executed, and if the result of the lottery is a win, conversation advance notice may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the conversation announcement is executed and prevent the player from getting tired of the conversation announcement early.

Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the conversation notice is established, and all the conversation notice effects are configured to reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following fluctuations occur as in the first to third embodiments. It may be configured to execute even an out-of-range variation pattern that does not reach, and in that case, a notice display (see FIG. 45(c)) that the conversation notice is not established may be displayed.

Next, the variable display setting process 4 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 4 (S1340). In the variable display setting process 4 (FIG. 59, S1340) in the fourth embodiment, each process of S1520 to S1524 is added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment. For other processing, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

After S1511 or S1512 is executed, the process of S1520 is executed. In the process of S1520, it is determined whether the value of the conversation notice presentation counter 223f is 1 (S1520). The conversation notice production counter 223f is set to 1 when the display conversation notice command is set in the process of S1446 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440), so that the conversation notice production counter 223f is 1. This means that the display conversation notice command has been set.

When it is determined that the conversation notice counter 223f is 1 (S1520: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is not 1 (S1520: No), it is determined whether the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 2 (S1522). When it is determined that the value of the conversation notice production counter 223f is 2 (S1522: Yes), the display conversation notice production command is set (S1523). After that, the value of the conversation notice presentation counter 223f is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1524). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the conversation notice counter 223f is not 2 (S1522: No), this process ends.

In this way, if the conversation notice production counter 223f is 2, it indicates that the display conversation notice command is the next variation of the set variation, and therefore, as shown in FIG. A display conversation notice production command for displaying the conversation notice production is set. Therefore, the conversation notice effect (see FIGS. 6C and 7A) corresponding to the conversation notice can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the timing of the start of fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the command determination processing 3 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S2120). The command determination processing 3 (FIG. 60, S2120) in the fourth embodiment is different from the command determination processing (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment in that the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 35(a), S2205) is changed. It is changed to the pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220), and the processes of S2240 and S2241 are added. Since the variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220) is the same process as the process described in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S2210 of the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 60, S2120) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is not received (S2210: No), the processing of S2240. Is executed. In the process of S2240, it is determined whether the display conversation notice effect command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2240). If it is determined that the display conversation notice production command is received (S2240: Yes), the conversation notice production process is executed (S2241).

Here, the conversation advance notice effect process (S2241) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the conversation notice production process (S2241).

In the conversation notice production process (FIG. 61, S2241), first, a conversation notice production data table corresponding to the previous variation stop symbol is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). The conversation notice production data table is the same as the conversation notice data table in the first embodiment in which only the conversation notice production is individually extracted and set. In the third embodiment, the conversation notice data table is configured to be set individually for the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect, but the conversation notice data table dedicated to the conversation notice effect and the fourth embodiment of the third embodiment are configured. It has the same configuration as the conversation announcement effect data table in the embodiment. The conversation notice data table in the fourth embodiment is a data table in which display data of only conversation notice is set, as shown in FIG. 45(b).

A transfer data table corresponding to the conversation notice effect data table set in the process of S2801 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802). The data table determination flag is set to ON (S2803), time data is set to the clock counter 233h based on the set data table (S2804), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2805), and this processing is ended.

With the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the conversation notice can be executed without presetting the conversation notice variation pattern dedicated to the conversation notice. Therefore, the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced.

In addition, even if the lottery result is in a variation mode, it can be expected that the conversation notice will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player even if the lottery result is missed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In addition, in the second to fourth embodiments, the stop symbol for which the conversation notice is executed has been described in the case where the left symbol and the right symbol have different display modes (reach display mode), but not limited to this, reach display It may be a display mode of the stop symbol of the reach disengagement in the case of being out of the mode, or a display mode showing the big hit after the big hit. In such a case, for example, in a conversation notice out of reach, special conversation contents such as brother's conversation are displayed because of the same pattern, and the probability that the fluctuation is reach is higher than in other cases. It may be set to be high (in the case of reach, it is easy to execute a conversation notice with a stop pattern out of reach). By doing so, it is possible to expect the execution of the conversation notice even if the player has any stop symbol. In addition, when the conversation announcement is executed from the jackpot pattern after the jackpot, by making it easy to execute when the fluctuation is a jackpot, the conversation announcement is executed at the first fluctuation after the jackpot, and the jackpot is continuously hit. The player can expect to become big and can enjoy the game even after the big hit.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the conversation notice is executed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice change pattern has been described. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the conversation notice is executed, spheres of different colors are displayed, one of them is selected by the lottery, and moved to the conversation notice comment window. The difference is that the background of the comment window is changed to the color of the sphere by touching. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Characteristics of conversation notice in the fifth embodiment>
62(a) and 62(b) show a conversation announcement in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62(a), when the conversation announcement is displayed, four different colored balls Q1 to Q4 are displayed. Specifically, the sphere Q1 is a blue sphere, the sphere Q2 is a yellow sphere, the sphere Q3 is a green sphere, and the sphere Q4 is a red sphere. At the same time that the comment is displayed from the left pattern (the turtle pattern in FIG. 62(a)), the effect display in which the ball Q1 moves in the comment window displaying the comment is displayed, and when the comment window is touched, the figure is displayed. As shown in 62(b), the color of the comment window is changed to the same blue color as that of the sphere Q1.

Note that which of the balls Q1 to Q4 is to be moved toward the comment window is determined by lottery based on the selected variation pattern. The probability that the red ball Q4 is selected when the lottery result of the most fluctuating pattern is a win is set to be high, and then the green ball Q3, the yellow ball Q2, and the blue ball Q1 are judged in order. The probability of being selected when the result is a big hit is set to be high.

With such a configuration, the red sphere Q1 is selected, and the comment window changes to red, so that the player can expect a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the four spheres are displayed every time, but some of them may be displayed by lottery or the like. For example, a plurality of blue spheres Q1 may be displayed. (For example, four spheres) may be displayed, or three blue spheres Q1 may be displayed and one red sphere Q4 may be displayed with different variations. With such a configuration, if the red ball Q4 or the like having a high expectation for a jackpot is included, it can be expected that the red ball Q4 does not move. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by looking at which ball is displayed.

FIG. 63A is a diagram schematically showing a display effect selection table 1 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. This display effect selection table 1 is a selection table for determining the effect color (selected color) of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the conversation notice, which is moved to the comment window. is there. As shown in FIG. 63(a), a display effect counter for each effect color corresponding to a change pattern (here, the change patterns are schematically displayed as Nos. 1 to 7 for the sake of simplicity). 233k has been allocated. Although details will be described later, the effect color selected in the display effect selection table 1 is temporarily stored in the area 0 (not shown) of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. In the work RAM 233, areas 0 to 3 (not shown) are set in advance as storage areas for determining the effect colors of the balls Q1 to Q4. The details of how to determine the effect colors of the balls Q1 to Q4 will be described later.

In addition, No. of the production selection table for display 234a5. 1-No. The conversation notice variation pattern shown by No. 4 is a deviation conversation notice variation pattern in which the lottery result is missed. 6-No. 7 is a winning conversation advancement variation pattern in which the lottery result is a win. For example, the No. When 4 is selected and the value of the display effect counter 233k is 30, the yellow sphere Q2 is selected.

FIG. 63(b) is a diagram schematically showing a display effect selection table 2 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. In the display effect selection table 2, among the four effect colors of the sphere Q1 to the ball Q4, a combination pattern of three effect colors excluding the effect color determined in the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 63(a)). It is a selection table for determining.

As shown in FIG. 63(b), combinations of effect colors are set, and the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each pattern for each variation pattern. For example, if the selected variation pattern is No. In the case of the variation pattern of 1 (offset conversation announcement variation pattern) and the value of the display effect counter 233k is 70, pattern 2 (blue:yellow:green) is selected. When the pattern 2 is selected, data indicating the effect color of blue in area 1 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, yellow in area 2 and green in area 3 are stored. Although the details will be described later, in the processing of S2515 of the display conversation notice processing 2 (S2250, FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, which of area Q0 to area Q0 is assigned to area 0 to area 3 respectively. A process of determining whether to correspond is executed. For pattern 2, data indicating blue in area 1, yellow in area 2 and green in area 3 are set. Similarly, in patterns 3 to 5, areas 1 to 3 are set in order from the left color shown in the display effect selection table 2 (FIG. 63(b)).

With such a configuration, even if the same combination of effect colors is selected in the areas 0 to 3, the positions of the effect colors displayed on the spheres Q1 to Q4 can be set differently, It is possible to suppress the problem that the same sphere among the spheres Q1 to Q4 moves to the comment window every time and the moving sphere is discriminated by the player before the sphere moves. Also, the combination of the positions of the effect colors displayed on the balls Q1 to Q4 can be randomized, and the player can be provided with a fresh effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

<Conversation notice data table in the fifth embodiment>
FIG. 64 is a data table for displaying the conversation notice, the conversation notice effect, and the notice effects of the balls Q1 to Q4 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the conversation notice data table of the first embodiment is that in the conversation notice data table of the fifth embodiment, display data (sphere display information) for displaying notice effect of spheres Q1 to Q4 and sphere Q1. The difference is that one of the balls Q4 is selected and moved, and display data of the effect for changing the background color of the comment window is set.

In addition, by selecting from the display effect selection table 1 (see 63(a)) and the display effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 63(b)) described above, information on each effect color of the sphere Q1 to the ball Q4 is obtained. The information of the selection color determined by the display effect selection table 1 (FIG. 63A) is set as the sphere display information (with movement) and the selection color of the background of the comment window.

In the example of the conversation announcement data table of FIG. 64, at the address 0032H, as the ball announcement, the pattern data of the balls Q1 to Q4, the display position, the enlargement ratio, the respective effect colors and the like data are set. At the address 0064H, the comment contents (display character information), the display position information (X, Y), and the color information of the background color of the comment window are set for the comment of the conversation notice, in addition to the ball display information similar to the address 0032H. .. The display color normally shown is white. At the address 0096H, as the sphere display information, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the display information after the set sphere has moved among the spheres Q1 to Q4 is set. Regarding the movement of the sphere, it is set so that the sphere is moved to the comment window by setting information that the sphere is gradually moved to the comment window. Further, the display data of the background color of the comment window (the effect color selected in the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 64(a))) is set.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment>
FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment has a display effect counter 233k added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment.

The display effect counter 233k is a counter used when deciding one of the balls Q1 to Q4 displayed in the notice display of the conversation notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to move to the comment window. .. The display effect counter 233k is acquired in the processing of the display conversation notice processing (FIG. 68, S2511) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Also, the value is incremented by 1 and updated in the process of S2107 of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The initial value is set to 0 and the upper limit value is 99. When 99 is updated and further updated, the initial value is updated to 0.

Further, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment, a display effect selection table 234a5 is added to the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment. The display effect selection table 234a5 has been described above with reference to FIG. 63, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment>
66, the command determination processing 4 (S2130) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 4 (S2130). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 66, S2130) in the fifth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment in that the display conversation advance notice process (FIG. 36, S2209) is the display conversation. It is changed to the advance notice process 2 (FIG. 67, S2250). For other processing, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

With reference to FIG. 67, the display conversation notice process 2 (S2250) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the display conversation notice process 2 (S2250).

In the display conversation notice process 2 (S2250 in FIG. 67), first, the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired (S2511). Then, the conversation notice data table corresponding to the conversation notice command is determined from the conversation notice selection table 234a3 (S2512). Next, based on the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the processing of S2511, the effect color corresponding to the variation pattern is determined from the display effect selection table 1 (FIG. 63(a)), and the conversation determined in S2512. Data indicating the selected effect color is set in the area 0 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, which is set in the notice data table (S2513).

From the display effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 63(b)) based on the remainder value obtained by adding 13 to the value obtained by squaring the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in S2511, and dividing by 100 A display pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and sequentially set in areas 1 to 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 (S2514). The setting from area 1 to area 3 is set in advance for each display pattern, and among the colors shown in FIG. 63(b), areas 1 to 3 are sequentially set from the left.

In this way, when the display pattern is determined from the display effect selection table 2 (FIG. 63(b)), the value of the display effect counter 233k is squared, 13 is added, and the remainder is obtained by dividing by 100. By configuring to select, it is possible to prevent the problem that the combination of the effect color and the display pattern selected from the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 63A) is the same every time. Further, by calculating different values from the same counter, the number of counters can be reduced and the amount of data can be reduced.

The value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2511 is divided by 4, and the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 corresponding to the areas 0 to 3 are set based on the value of the remainder, and the determination is made in the process of S2512. Information of the balls Q1 to Q4 is set in the conversation notice data table, and the conversation notice data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2515). The method of determining the balls Q1 to Q4 corresponding to the areas 0 to 3 is processed as follows. The remainder values 0 to 3 are preset so as to correspond to the areas 0 to 3, respectively. Areas 0 to 3 are allocated to the balls Q1 to Q4 in ascending order from the remainder value.

Specifically, if the remainder value is 3, the data of area 3 is assigned to sphere Q1, the data of area 0 is assigned to sphere Q2, the data of area 1 is assigned to sphere Q3, and the data of area 2 is assigned to sphere Q4. It

With this configuration, the effect colors displayed on the spheres Q1 to Q4 can be randomized. Therefore, even when the same color combination is selected, the combination of the positions of the colors displayed on the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 can be different, and the display mode can be diversified. Therefore, various effects can be provided to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

A transfer data table corresponding to the conversation notice data table set in the process of S2515 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2516). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2517), the time data is set to the clock counter 233h based on the data table (S2518), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2519), and this processing is ended.

As described above, as the selection color to be moved to the comment window, the effect color of red is selected more easily in the jackpot conversation notice variation pattern than in the missed conversation notice variation pattern. Therefore, when a red ball is displayed and the player moves to the comment window, the player can increase his/her expectation for the jackpot.

Further, among the balls Q1 to Q4, the balls to be moved to the comment window are determined to be random, so that the player first displays the balls Q1 to Q4, and moves among them in the case of a big hit. When there is a display color of a sphere that has a high probability of being played, the player can play the game with the expectation that the sphere will not move to the comment window.

As for the combination of the display colors of the balls Q1 to Q4, the jackpot conversation notice variation pattern is configured such that many combinations having three or more red colors are selected as compared with the outlying conversation notice variation patterns. The player can expect the jackpot from the combination of the colors of the displayed balls Q1 to Q4.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, as the notice pattern, the balls Q1 to Q4 are displayed, and the background color of the comment window is changed by one of the colors, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, “●” is displayed as the hold display mode indicating the number of hold balls on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the number of hold numbers, and the information in the winning information storage area 223a is discriminated before the fluctuation starts. , The color of the hold display is changed based on the information. At the start of variation, the color of the comment window may be changed according to the color. When the color of the hold display is determined, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, when the winning/judgment determination result is a big hit, the probability that red is selected is set high, so that the player displays red. Once you do, you can have the expectation for a jackpot. Further, when the change starts, the comment window for the conversation notice changes to that color, so that even if the change in the color of the hold display is overlooked, the player can be informed easily.

<Regarding Modification of Pachinko Machine 10 in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the effect color to be moved to the comment window is selected, and then the colors of the remaining spheres are determined. However, in the modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the display of the spheres Q1 to Q4. The difference is that each color is determined, and then the process for determining the effect color to be moved to the comment window is executed. The same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 68 is a diagram schematically showing a display effect selection table 3 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. In the display effect selection table 3, the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each combination of the display colors of the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4, depending on the result of the hit determination. As the display color, four combinations are set from among four colors of blue, yellow, green and red. The numbers shown in correspondence with the display colors of the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) indicate the number of spheres of that color.

Specifically, if the result of the hit determination is a hit and the value of the display effect counter is 35, three green display colors and one red display color are obtained from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). Individuals are selected. The selected display colors are stored in areas 0 to 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display controller 114 in a predetermined order. As the order of storage, areas 0 to 3 are stored in the order of display colors blue, yellow, green, and red shown in the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). When there are three green display colors and one red display color, the display color data indicating green in area 0, green in area 1, green in area 2, and red in area 3 are stored respectively. It Further, to give an example, when the result of the hit determination is a hit and the display effect counter 233k is any of 41 to 55, one blue display color, one yellow display color, and one green display color are displayed. One display color and one red display color are selected, and four display colors forming the spheres Q1 to Q4 are determined. In the modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the area 0 is set in advance corresponding to the sphere Q1, the area 1 is set to the sphere Q2, the area 2 is set to the sphere Q3, and the area 3 is set to correspond to the sphere Q4. There is.

Then, in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, data indicating the display color of blue is stored in area 0, area 1 is yellow, area 2 is green, area 3 is red, and area 3 is displayed in red according to the above-described predetermined order.

In the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68), the red display color is more likely to be selected when the hit determination result is a hit than when the hit determination result is miss. .. That is, if the sphere Q includes a red display color, the player can have an expectation of winning. Therefore, by displaying the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4, it is possible to predict the win/fail before the win/no determination result is notified by the third symbol. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect in which the ball Q is displayed, and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, in the display effect selection table 3 (FIG. 68), it is set that two or more green display colors are included when the hit/no hit determination result is a hit, rather than when it is a hit. Also from this, the player can predict the win/no judgment result from the display color of the ball Q.

In addition, by setting the display probabilities to be different depending on whether the display color is selected or the same combination depending on whether the hit determination result is a win or a miss, the sphere Q4 It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the result of the hit/miss judgment from the display color.

FIG. 69 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the display effect selection table 4 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. The display effect selection table 4 (see FIG. 69) is a data table for determining the sphere to be moved to the comment window among the balls Q1 to Q4 determined from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). is there.

As shown in FIG. 69, the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned corresponding to area 0 to area 3 depending on whether the hit determination result is a win or a miss. Specifically, if the result of the hit determination is a win and the value of the acquired display effect counter 233k is 35, it is determined that the area 1, that is, the sphere Q2, is a sphere (selected color) that moves to the comment window. It should be noted that the values of the display effect counter 233k in different ranges are assigned to areas 0 to 3 depending on whether it is a win or a miss. Further, in the case of winning, the areas 2 and 3, that is, the balls Q3 and Q4 are set to be selected more easily than in the case of being out.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set the selected sphere to be different easily depending on whether it is a hit or a miss. Therefore, the result of the hit determination can be predicted from the selected sphere.

Further, in the case of winning, by making the areas 2 and 3 easier to be selected than in the case of being out of the area, green and red display colors are displayed in the areas 2 and 3 according to a predetermined storage order. Since it is configured to be easily stored, the display color of red or green is easily selected as the display color to be moved to the comment window. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to predict the hit/miss determination result from the display color of the ball Q moving to the comment window, and it is possible to give the player new enjoyment.

<Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
In the modification of the fifth embodiment, the display conversation notice process 2 (FIG. 67, S2250) of the command determination process 4 (FIG. 66, S2130) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment is used for the display. It is changed to conversation advance notice processing 3 (FIG. 70, S2260). As for other processing, the same processing as that of the fifth embodiment is executed, and therefore its illustration and description are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 70, the display conversation notice process 3 (S2260) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the display conversation notice process 3 (S2260).

In the display conversation notice process 3 (FIG. 70, S2260), first, the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired (S2521). Then, the conversation notice data table corresponding to the conversation notice command is determined from the conversation notice selection table 234a3 (S2522). Next, based on the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2521, the display color corresponding to the win/fail judgment result is selected from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68), and the work of the display control device 114 is selected. Areas 0 to 3 of the RAM 233 are respectively stored in a predetermined order. Here, the predetermined order is stored from area 0 to area 3 in ascending order in the order of display colors shown in the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) (S2523).

Based on the value of the remainder of the result obtained by dividing the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the processing of S2521 by 4 and the result of judgment whether the area is 0 or 3 from the effect selection table for display 4 (see FIG. 69). Is selected, and the selection result is set as the selected color of any of sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 to be moved to the comment window (S2524).

The display colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4 determined in the process of S2523 and the sphere (selected color) that moves to the comment window determined in the process of S2524 are set in the conversation notice data table determined in the process of S2522. (S2525).

A transfer data table corresponding to the conversation notice data table set in the process of S2522 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2526). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2527), the time data is set to the clock counter 233h based on the data table (S2528), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2529), and this processing is ended.

In this way, by determining each display color of the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 first and determining the sphere (selected color) to be moved to the comment window from among them, to the comment window among the spheres Q1 to Q4. The selected color to be moved can be set at random.

Further, when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, it is configured that red is easily selected as the selected display color, and the selected color is more easily determined than when the sphere Q4 in which the red display color is easily determined is out. Therefore, by displaying the red color, the player can be expected to win the jackpot. Furthermore, by moving the red-colored sphere to the comment window, the expectation for a big hit can be further amplified.

Further, by moving the sphere Q4 to the comment window, even if the color of the sphere Q4 is a display color other than red, it is possible to give a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 are colored red. Even if the display color is not included, the player can be expected to win the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player loses expectation for a big hit from the display colors of the balls Q1 to Q4 and disappoints early.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the conversation notice executed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice variation pattern, the conversation notice is given when the contents of the conversation are satisfied with predetermined contents. The case where the performance is executed has been described. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, in the conversation announcement, when the content of the conversation is established, the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed to determine whether the conversation announcement effect is executed. The difference is that the process of giving notification is executed. Further, in the first embodiment, among the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped, a comment indicating the content of the conversation is displayed from the left symbol, and then, Although the comment indicating the content of the conversation is displayed from the right symbol, in the sixth embodiment, the left symbol is stopped, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are scroll-displayed (variable display) on the left. The difference is that the comment indicating the content of the conversation notice is displayed from the design, and then the right symbol is stopped and displayed, and the comment indicating the content of the conversation notice is displayed from the right design. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

71(a) to (c) and FIGS. 72(a) to (c) are diagrams showing a display mode of a conversation notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 71(a) is a state in which in the variation mode of the third symbol in the conversation notice variation pattern, the third symbol starts variable display, the left symbol is stopped and displayed, and the comment that is the content of the conversation is displayed. It is the figure which showed. In this case, the middle symbol and the right symbol are scroll-displayed from the top to the bottom of the third symbol at high speed or low speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the right symbol is stopped and displayed, and the content of the conversation is displayed. In the case of FIG. 71(b), the conversation content of the right symbol is "I'm good!", whereas the conversation content of the right symbol is "Shall we compete?" Shows the case where is satisfied. On the other hand, in FIG. 72(c), even if the right symbol is stopped, the comment of the conversation content is not displayed from the right symbol, and the comment is not established. In this way, when the conversation is not established, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed with any of the symbols thereafter, and the fact that the result of the hit determination is out is notified.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 71(b), after the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 71(c), the characters “press the button which informs the player to press the frame button 22! Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the variable display of the middle symbol disappears or is hidden by the character, two "○"s are displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 81 blinks alternately to display the third symbol. It is configured to notify that the design is changing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(a), when the frame button 22 is pressed, the "competition effect" shown in FIG. 6(c), which is a conversation notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The text "Success competition production" is displayed. On the other hand, when the conversation advance notice effect is not executed even if the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the player is informed that the conversation notice effect is not executed, "sorry". Is displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to display the display mode in which the conversation is established, even in a variation pattern in which the conversation notice effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that many presentations in which conversations are not established are displayed.

Further, when the conversation is established, it is possible to make the player feel as if a lottery is performed by pressing the frame button 22 as to whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed, and press the frame button 22. The enjoyment of playing can be given to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the conversation is established, the frame button 22 is pressed to notify that the conversation notice effect will be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 is pressed. Alternatively, the value of the display effect counter 233k may be acquired, it may be determined whether the value is a predetermined hit value, and if it is a hit, the conversation notice effect may be executed. In this case, the conversation notice variation pattern is configured to be established with or without executing the conversation notice production, and the data tables for displaying the conversation notice and the conversation notice production are set separately. Every other time, when the conversation notice production is executed, a data table dedicated to the conversation notice production is set, but when the conversation notice production is not executed, the display set in the display data table of the conversation notice change pattern is displayed. The display content based on the data may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

With this configuration, it is possible to randomly determine whether or not the conversation notice production is executed, and the player can enjoy the variation of the conversation notice variation pattern in various patterns.

<Regarding electrical configuration in sixth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

In the display control device 114 according to the sixth embodiment, a button pressing flag 233n and a button effect flag 233p are added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, respectively, as compared with the first embodiment.

The button press flag 233n is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed. This button press flag 233n is pressed (operated) by the voice lamp controller 113 during the effective period in the process of S2271 of the command determination process 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114. It is set to ON when the button press command output based on the fact is received. On the other hand, it is turned off in the process of S3056 of the button press effect process (FIG. 77, S3050) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The button depression flag 233n is set to OFF in the initial setting executed when the power is turned on.

The button effect flag 233p is a flag indicating that pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is a button valid period (set based on the conversation announcement variation pattern) in which the frame button 22 is set to be valid. The button effect flag 233p is set to ON based on the start timing of the button effective period in the process of S3052 of the button pressing effect process (S3050 of FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. On the other hand, in the process of S3059, it is set to OFF based on the end of the button effective period.

<Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 74, the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1307) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 74, S1307), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter (not shown) is 0 (S1341). The SW valid time counter is a counter provided in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a counter for counting the valid time of the frame button 22. Note that this SW effective time counter is automatically set when a variation pattern (in this embodiment, a variation pattern of a contact notice that is a hit or a miss) is set in advance for a button valid period for validating the frame button 22. Is set automatically.

When it is determined in the process of S1341 that the value of the SW valid time counter is 0 (S1341: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter is greater than 0 (S1341: No), the value of the SW valid time counter is decremented by 1 (S1342). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (S1343). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1343: Yes), a button pressing command is set (S1344). After that, the value of the SW valid time counter is set to 0 (S1345). On the other hand, in the processing of S1343, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1343: No), this processing ends.

The other control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as the control processing according to the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Sixth Embodiment>
In the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the sixth embodiment, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 33B). ), the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) and the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) are the command determination process 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) and the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180). Have been changed respectively. The other processing is the same as the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination processing 5 (S2140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 5 (S2140). In the command determination processing 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) in the sixth embodiment, each processing of S2270 to S2271 is added to the command determination processing (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment. Further, the respective processes of S2201 to S2213 and S2219 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the respective processes of S2201 to S2213 and S2219 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S2210, when it is determined that the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is not received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2210: No), the button press command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. It is determined whether or not (S2270). If it is determined that the button press command is received (S2270: Yes), the button press flag 233n is set to ON (S2271). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button pressing command has not been received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2270: No), the process of S2212 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the display setting process 2 (S2180) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 2 (S2180). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180) in the sixth embodiment, the process of S3050 is added to the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the first embodiment. Each process of S3001 to S3021 in the sixth embodiment is the same as each process of S3001 to S3021 in the first embodiment.

After the processing of S3007 is executed, the processing of S3050 is executed. In the process of S3050, a button press effect process is executed. The button press effect process (S3050) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of the button pressing effect process (S3050) which is one process in the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the sixth embodiment. To do. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the button press effect process (S3050).

In the button press effect processing (FIG. 77, S3050), first, it is determined whether or not the button effective period has started (S3051). Whether or not the button valid period is started is set in advance in the display data table of the set conversation announcement variation pattern, and it is determined by the setting. In the process of S3051, when it is determined that the button valid period is started (S3051: Yes), the button effect flag 233p is set to ON (S3052). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button valid period is not started (S3051: No), the process of S3053 is executed.

In the process of S3053, it is determined whether the button is in the valid period (S3053). When it is determined that the button is in the valid period (S3053: Yes), it is determined whether the button pressing flag 233n is ON (S3054). When it is determined that the button press flag 233n is ON (S3054: Yes), the conversation advance notice determination data table is displayed on the display data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 based on the selected variation pattern. (S3055). The conversation notice determination data table is a data table in which a notification mode of whether or not the conversation notice effect shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B is executed is set. After that, the button press flag 233n and the button effect flag 233p are set to off (S3056). On the other hand, in the processing of S3054, when it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n is off (S3054: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S3053, when it is determined that the button is out of the valid period (S3053: No), it is determined whether the button effect flag 233p is on (S3057). When it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is ON (S3057: Yes), an alternative notice display data table (not shown) is set (S3058). It should be noted that this alternative notice display data table is for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has not been pressed by the player during the effective period of the button. A notification or the like indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed instead of the player is displayed. After that, the button effect flag 233p is set to OFF (S3059), and this processing ends.

In this way, it is possible to determine that the frame button 22 has not been pressed by the player by determining whether or not the button effect flag 233p is set to ON even though it is outside the button valid period. Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, by displaying the alternative display mode, it is possible to suppress the problem that the presentation of the conversation announcement becomes uncoordinated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable in the presentation.

Further, in the processing of S3057, when it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is off (S3057: No), this processing ends.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 87. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the stop pattern of the previous variation is a stop symbol for which the conversation announcement is possible, and it is determined whether or not the conversation announcement is executed in the next variation, and the predetermined conversation announcement The case where the content (comment content) is displayed has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the maximum time for displaying the conversation notice is preset in the conversation notice variation pattern, and if it is within that time, the frame button 22 of the player is displayed. It is different from the second embodiment in that it is configured to display the next set comment based on the operation. The same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the presentation mode of the conversation announcement in the seventh embodiment>
78(a) to (c) are diagrams showing an effect mode in a conversation notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. In the conversation notice shown in FIG. 78(a), the win/fail judgment result shown in FIG. 81 is incorrect, and the conversation notice content of pattern 2 selected when the talk notice is established or the win/fail judgment result shown in FIG. 82 has a high probability. It is the figure which displayed the 1st conversation advance notice content determined from the conversation advance notice contents of the pattern 2 selected when it is a game state (probability change game state). FIG. 78(a) is a diagram showing a state in which comments indicating conversation contents are displayed from the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Actually, the conversation content is displayed before the right pattern, rather than the left symbol, and after a predetermined time, a comment indicating the conversation content is displayed from the right symbol. Meanwhile, during this time, the middle symbols are scroll-displayed from the upper direction to the lower direction at high speed or low speed.

Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, as shown in FIG. 78(a), the second pattern is the second pattern in the conversation notice pattern table (FIG. 81 or FIG. 82) in the left symbol and the right symbol. The notice contents of the conversation are displayed. Here, a diagram is shown in which the comment contents are displayed from the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Actually, the comment content is displayed before the left symbol, and after a predetermined time, the comment content of the conversation is displayed from the right symbol.

When the content of the conversation is established as shown in FIG. 78(b), the conversation notice effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 78(c). In the conversation notice production shown in FIG. 78(b), the player is to compete for the goal with a plurality of symbols including the left symbol and the right symbol, and reach the player with the symbol that reaches the goal first. I am informing you. In addition, when this conversation notice production is displayed, two "○"s are displayed side by side in the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, and are alternately blinked. This is a tentative symbol of the third symbol, and by blinking, the player is informed that the third symbol is being variably displayed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the odd-numbered symbols “1, 3, 5, 7” indicate that a high-probability game state that makes the probability of determining a big hit higher than the normal state is given in the hit determination after the big hit. In the symbols, the even symbols of "2, 4, 6, 8" are respectively set to the symbols indicating that the normal gaming state, which is the normal winning/probability determination probability, is given even after the jackpot. Therefore, the player can expect that the symbol indicating that the high-probability game state is given will reach the first goal by the conversation notice production. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with an interest in which symbol wins. Therefore, the player can play with interest in the game until he wins the jackpot, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

Further, although details will be described later, by pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to display other types of comments of the left symbol and the right symbol. Furthermore, depending on the result of the judgment, the conversation notice pattern table (see FIG. 81 and FIG. 82) is set so that the contents of the selected conversation are different. It is possible to determine which is easier to reach the goal first.

In the seventh embodiment, when the odd symbol on the left symbol and the even symbol on the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the previous change, the conversation notice is set to be executed. When it is established, it is possible to enjoy and know which of the odd number symbol and the even number symbol will be the reach, by the conversation notice production.

In the present embodiment, in the conversation notice pattern table (see FIG. 81 and FIG. 82), the contents of the conversation up to the third, that is, until the player presses the frame button 22 twice within the maximum conversation notice period, the comment. Is configured to be changed and displayed based on that, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to be more or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to display some of the preset third symbols 1 to 9 and execute the conversation notice effect, for example, the third symbols 1 to 9 In addition to some of them, a temporary symbol or the like (for example, a character to which the letter X is attached) that does not notify which of the high-probability game state and the normal game state is attached may be displayed. .. With such a configuration, the reach is established with the provisional symbol, so that the player can have an expectation for the high-probability game state until the jackpot is started or until the game after the jackpot. it can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), a description will be given of a conversation notice and a display period of the conversation notice effect in the conversation notice effect in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 79(a) is a time chart showing a case in which the conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is established, and FIG. 79(b) is the conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. 6 is a time chart showing a case where is not established.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the maximum conversation notice period, which is the maximum period in which the conversation notice can be executed, is set in advance in the conversation notice change pattern in which the conversation notice is established. In this embodiment, the maximum conversation notice period is set to 5 seconds before the start of display of the reach display mode such as super reach from the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the conversation notice period shown in FIG. 79A is configured to be variable within the maximum conversation notice period. Note that this conversation notice period is a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) after the button valid period (set up to the maximum conversation notice period after the first conversation content is displayed) is set. ), it is set to end when the frame button 22 is not pressed.

Then, the remaining time until the start of the reach display mode is judged, and the conversation notice effect is executed. As for this conversation notice effect, three types of conversation notice effects are configured by the conversation notice effect data table as shown in FIGS. 83(a)-(b) and FIG. It is configured such that the conversation notice production data table composed of the production time closest to the time from the end of the conversation notice period to the start of the reach display mode is selected. In addition, the shorter the effect time, the shorter the time from the display of the conversation notice effect to the goal of the symbol (the faster the moving speed). For the remaining time from the goal of the symbol to the display of the reach display mode, the final display content of the goal of the symbol is repeatedly displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a conversation announcement according to the player who presses the frame button 22 and the player who does not press the frame button 22. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed, a different effect is displayed as compared with the case where the frame button 22 is not pressed, so that the player can enjoy the pressing of the frame button 22.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79(b), when the conversation announcement is not established, the period from the start of variation of the third symbol to the temporary suspension of variation is set as the maximum conversation announcement period. Therefore, the conversation announcement can be enjoyed until the symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, even if the result of the hit/miss judgment is wrong, it is possible to play the game with the expectation of a big hit by the announcement of the conversation.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Seventh Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment with respect to the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment. In the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment, a button pressing flag 233n, a button effect flag 223p, and a progress counter 233r are added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, respectively, as compared with the second embodiment. Further, in the character assignment ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a conversation notice pattern table 234a6 and a conversation notice effect data table 234a7 are added. The other configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The button press flag 233n and the button effect flag 233p are the same as those described in the sixth embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The elapsed counter 233r is a counter for counting the time until the frame button 22 is pressed when the button valid period is set. This progress counter 233r is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the button is in the valid period in the process of S3064 of the button press effect process 2 (S3060 of FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S3067, when it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is turned on, the initial value 0 is reset. It should be noted that the progress counter 233r is set to a process of ending the conversation advance notice period when it is equal to or more than a predetermined value (a count value corresponding to 5 seconds in the present embodiment) in the process of S3065.

The conversation notice pattern table 234a6 is a data table for determining the comment contents of the conversation notice. The conversation notice pattern table 234a6 is composed of a conversation notice pattern table (missing) shown in FIG. 81 and a conversation notice pattern table (hit) shown in FIG.

The conversation notice pattern table (disengagement) shown in FIG. 81 is a table selected when the result of the hit/miss determination is disengagement. Further, depending on whether the selected off-conversation notice variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the conversation announcement conversation is established or a variation pattern in which the conversation announcement is not established, the conversation announcement patterns of patterns 1 to 3 are respectively selected. It is set. The value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each of the patterns 1 to 3.

Specifically, for example, when the result of the judgment is wrong, the conversation preview is a variation pattern of the conversation announcement in which the conversation of the conversation announcement is not established, and when the value of the display effect counter is 40, the conversation content of the pattern 2 Is selected. When this pattern 2 is selected, first, the content of the first comment, a comment "Let's compete with everyone!" is displayed from the left pattern, and after a predetermined time, "..." is displayed from the right pattern. Is displayed. Then, within 5 seconds, if the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, the comment "please!!" is displayed from the second symbol, which is the second comment, and after a predetermined time, from the right symbol " What should I do?" is displayed. After that, if the player presses the frame button 22 within 5 seconds, a comment "Let's do it!" is displayed from the left symbol, and after a predetermined time, "I will stop this time!" from the right symbol. !” is displayed.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for 5 seconds after the first or second comment is displayed, the comment preview comment is switched to the display mode set to the conversation preview variation pattern and displayed.

Thus, within the maximum conversation notice period, the comment display can be switched in accordance with the operation of the frame button 22, and even if a comment that the conversation of the conversation notice is not established is displayed once, the player Can have an expectation that the conversation will be replaced by pressing the frame button 22.

Next, the conversation notice pattern table (hit) shown in FIG. 82 is a table selected when the result of the hit/miss judgment is hit. In the conversation notice pattern table (hit) shown in FIG. 82, the conversation notice patterns are divided into cases where the jackpot type is a jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot) and jackpot B (16 round normal jackpot) respectively. Patterns 1 to 3 are set respectively. The values of the display effect counter 233k are assigned to the respective patterns 1 to 3. In pattern 2, the value of the display effect counter 233k is set to the maximum, and it is configured to be easily selected.

Here, the conversation content of the pattern 2 when the jackpot A is described will be described. The conversation notice in the seventh embodiment is executed when the odd symbols are left on the left symbol and the even symbols are stopped on the right symbol in the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the left symbol, when the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol that informs that it is a jackpot A, and in the right symbol when the jackpot is a jackpot B that informs that it is a jackpot Is executed.

In the conversation notice of pattern 2 in the case of the big hit A, the comment "Let's compete with everyone!" is displayed from the left symbol at the timing of the start of the variation of the conversation notice variation pattern. Then, after a predetermined time, a comment "I'm good!" is displayed from the right pattern to inform that the conversation has been established. After that, when the player presses the frame button 22 within 5 seconds, a comment "I will win this time!" is displayed from the left symbol. Then, after a predetermined time, a comment "May lose" from the right symbol is displayed, and a comment that causes the player to expect the left symbol to win in the conversation notice production is displayed. After that, when the player presses the frame button 22 within 5 seconds, a comment "The condition is in perfect condition" is displayed from the left pattern, and after a predetermined time, "Yay na..." from the right pattern. A comment is displayed, and a comment that makes the player expect the left symbol to win is displayed.

With such a configuration, the left symbol is a symbol to which the big hit A is given when the big hit occurs, so that the player can be expected to become the big hit A more. In fact, when the determination result is the big hit A, the conversation announcement of the pattern 2 is easier to be selected than when it is the big hit B, so that the big hit A can be expected to be a big hit.

On the other hand, in the conversation content of the pattern 2 selected when the determination result is the big hit B, the second and subsequent comments of the case of the big hit A and the left symbol and the right symbol are exchanged. Therefore, the player expects a big hit B instead of a big hit A. However, when the determination result is the jackpot A, the pattern 3 is set to have the same conversation content as that of the pattern 2. Therefore, even with the pattern 2, the expectation for the jackpot is completely lost. It can be prevented.

In this way, since the probability that the conversation announcement pattern is selected is set higher in the conversation pattern for notifying the jackpot type depending on the jackpot type, it is possible to determine the hit determination result or the jackpot type from the conversation content. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the conversation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more entertaining the conversation announcement.

The conversation notice effect data table 234a7 is a data table for displaying the conversation notice effect shown in FIG. 78(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This conversation notice production data table 234a7 includes the conversation notice production data table 1 in which the effect time shown in FIG. 83(a) is set to 10 seconds and the conversation having the effect time shown in FIG. 83(b) is set to 8 seconds. The notice production data table 2 and the conversation notice production data table 3 shown in FIG. 84 in which the production time is set to 5 seconds are respectively configured.

In the conversation notice data table 234a7, background data showing the background of the competition, display data showing the symbols to be displayed, and various effect display data are set. Although omitted, similar to the display data table in the first embodiment, various display positions and parameters such as enlargement ratio are also set. In the conversation notice effect data tables 1 to 3 having different effect times, the speed at which the symbol moves to the goal is set to be different. In detail, the displacement of the symbol display position is variably set for each address. In addition to the above description, the conversation notice data table 234a7 has a plurality of settings for each winning symbol and each symbol to be displayed.

<Control Process Performed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Seventh Embodiment>
The frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1307) of the main process (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 74) in the sixth embodiment. , S1307) is executed. For other processing, the same processing as in the second embodiment is executed.

<Control Process Performed by Display Control Device 114 in Seventh Embodiment>
In the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment, the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is performed. The command determination processing 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) and the display setting processing (FIG. 38, S2103), which are one processing, are the command determination processing 6 (FIG. 85, S2190) and the display setting processing 3 (FIG. 86, S2650), respectively. has been edited. The other processing is the same as the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination processing 6 (S2190) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2190). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 85, S2190) in the seventh embodiment is different from the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) in the second embodiment in that the displayed conversation advance notice process (S2209) is changed to the process of S2280. Therefore, the processes of S2281 to S2282 are added. The processes of S2201 to S2206, S2215 to S2218, and S2220 to S2223 are the same as the processes of S2201 to S2206, S2215 to S2218, and S2220 to S2223 in the second embodiment.

In the processing of S2221, if it is determined that the variation pattern allows the advance notice of conversation to be established (S2221: Yes), the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired, and based on the value, the result of the judgment, and the jackpot type. Then, the conversation notice pattern is selected from the conversation notice pattern table 234a6 (S2280).

If it is determined in the process of S2206 that the display stop type command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether the button pressing command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2281). If it is determined that the button press command is received (S2281: Yes), the button press flag 233n is set to ON (S2282).

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the display setting process 3 (S2650) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 3 (S2650). In the display setting processing 3 (FIG. 86, S2650) in the seventh embodiment, the button pressing effect processing 2 (FIG. 87, S3060) is added to the display setting processing (FIG. 38, S2103) in the second embodiment. There is. For other processing, the same processing as in the second embodiment is executed.

After the processing of S3007 is executed, the button press effect processing 2 is executed (S3060). The button press effect process 2 (S3060) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

With reference to FIG. 87, the button press effect process 2 (S3060) which is one process in the display setting process 3 (FIG. 86, S2650) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the button press effect process 2 (S3060).

In the button press effect process 2 (FIG. 87, S3060), first, it is determined whether or not the button valid period is started (S3061). Whether or not the button valid period is started is set in advance in the display data table of the set conversation announcement variation pattern, and it is determined by the setting. In the process of S3061, when it is determined that the button valid period is started (S3061: Yes), the button effect flag 233p is set to ON (S3062). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button valid period is not started (S3061: No), the process of S3063 is executed.

In the process of S3063, it is determined whether the button is in the valid period (S3063). If it is determined that the button is in the valid period (S3063: Yes), the value of the elapsed counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S3064). It is determined whether the value of the elapsed counter 233r is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (S3065). In the present embodiment, the predetermined value here is set to a value indicating 5 seconds. When it is determined in the process of S3065 that the value of the elapsed counter 233r is less than the predetermined value (S3065: No), it is determined whether the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3066). When it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n is off (S3066: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3066: Yes), the value of the elapsed counter 233r is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S3067).

In this way, the elapsed time counter 233r is reset based on the determination that the button press flag 233n indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is on, so that the time during which the frame button 22 is not pressed is accurately determined. Can be timed.

After the processing of S3067 is executed, the display data of the next conversation content is set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the selected conversation notice pattern (S3068), and the button press flag 233n is set to OFF. (S3069). Here, if the data of the first conversation content is set, then the data of the second conversation content is set, and if the data of the second conversation content is set, the data of the third conversation content is set. Is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3063 that the button is not valid (S3063: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3065 that the value of the elapsed counter 233r is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S3065: Yes). ), the process of S3070 is executed. In the process of S3070, it is determined whether the button effect flag 233p is on (S3070). When it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is off (S3070: No), this process ends.

When it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is ON (S3070: Yes), it is determined whether the selected conversation announcement variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a conversation is established (S3071). When it is determined that the variation pattern is that the conversation is established (S3071: Yes), the conversation notice effect data table is determined based on the remaining time until the reach display mode. Here, for example, when the remaining time is 10 seconds or more, the conversation notice effect data table 1 (see FIG. 83(a)) having the effect time of 10 seconds is selected, and the remaining time is less than 8 seconds to 10 seconds. In this case, the conversation notice production data table 2 (see FIG. 83(b)) is selected, and when the remaining time is 5 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the conversation notice production data table 3 (see FIG. 83(c)). ) Is selected.

In this way, by configuring one of the conversation notice effect data tables 1 to 3 based on the remaining time until the reach display mode is started, until the reach display mode is started By effectively utilizing the time, it is possible to execute the conversation notice production. Further, since the maximum conversation notice period is set to 5 seconds before the reach display mode is started, even if the remaining time is shortest, all the conversation notice effects can be shown to the player. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S3070, when it is determined that the variation pattern is that the conversation is not established (S3071: No), the process of S3073 is executed.

In the process of S3073, the end of the conversation notice is set (S3073). Here, when the conversation notice production is being executed, the display data of the last address of the conversation notice production data table is set to be repeatedly displayed until the reach display mode is started. When the conversation notice is not established and the conversation notice is ended, the display based on the set display data table of the conversation notice change pattern is set to be displayed.

After the process of S3073 is executed, the button effect flag 233p is set to OFF (S3074), and the elapsed counter 233r and the button valid period are reset to 0 which is the initial value (S3075).

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, when the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed, the stop symbol determination flag for determining the stop symbol is set. The process of storing in the area for storing the previously stopped symbol determination flag was executed. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that an area for storing the last stop symbol determination flag is not provided and the process of storing the last stop symbol determination flag is not executed. .. In addition, in the eighth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation is determined, it is determined whether the conversation announcement can be executed, and the processing of executing the conversation announcement is performed. This is different from the first embodiment. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Eighth Embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment in the variable display of the main process (see FIG. 28). The setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 47, S1320). Note that the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 47, S1320) has already been described in detail in the second embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Control Process Performed by Display Control Device 114 in Eighth Embodiment>
In the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the eighth embodiment, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33(b)). ), the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) and the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) are the command determination process 7 (FIG. 89, S2350) and the display setting process 4 (FIG. 91, S2750). Have been changed respectively. The other processing is the same as the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination processing 7 (S2350) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 7 (S2350). The command determination processing 7 (FIG. 89, S2350) in the eighth embodiment is different from the command determination processing (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment in that the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 35(a), S2205) is changed. It is changed to the pattern command process 3 (FIG. 90, S2450), and each process of S2208 to S2211 is deleted. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command is received (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command process 3 is executed (S2450). The fluctuation pattern command processing 3 (S2450) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The fluctuation pattern command processing 3 (S2450) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern command processing 3 (S2450).

In the variation pattern command process 3 (FIG. 90, S2450), first, it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h is a predetermined value or more (in the present embodiment, a value indicating 3 seconds or more) (S2451). When it is determined that the value of the clock counter 233h is less than the predetermined value (S2451: No), it is determined whether or not the stored stop symbol determination flag indicates a symbol for which conversation notice can be given. In addition, here, the symbol which can be announced in advance of conversation is a combination in which the left symbol and the right symbol are symbols other than the reach symbol.

In the present embodiment, the combination other than the reach is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the conversation may be announced by the combination of the reach. In such a case, even if the player stops with the stop symbol out of reach, the conversation notice is executed in the next variation, so that the two variations can be made to appear as one variation. Further, even if all the symbols have the same symbol after the big hit, the conversation notice may be executed. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game after the big hit by setting a special conversation notice, for example, a conversation about the big hit.

In the processing of S2452, when it is determined that the stop symbol determination flag indicates a symbol that can be announced as a conversation (S2452: Yes), the selected variation pattern is a conversation announcement variation pattern that allows the conversation to be established. Is determined (S2453). When it is determined that the change pattern allows the conversation to be established (S2453: Yes), the display conversation notice process is executed (S2209). Note that this display conversation notice process (S2209) is the same as that already described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 36, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S2453, when it is determined that the conversation advance notice variation pattern in which the conversation is not established (S2453: No), the display conversation dummy notice process is executed (S2222). It should be noted that the display conversation dummy notice process (S2222) has already been described in detail in the second embodiment with reference to FIG. 49(b), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2456, the display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S2456).

Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is set. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main controller 110 actually produces a variation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table. When instructed by, while receiving the variation effect according to the set display data table on the third symbol display device 81, to receive the next display variation pattern command from the main control device 110 Since another variable display is suddenly started, there is a fear that the player feels uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation time longer than the set display data table is actually set. Even when the main control device 110 has instructed a change effect having the following, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 outputs the next display pattern, as will be described later. Until the command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Then, initial symbol information is set in the display data table set in the process of S2456 based on the stop symbol determination flag (S2456). Here, in the display data table in the eighth embodiment, based on the stop symbol determination flag, the initial symbol information is set for all the offset information of the symbol display until the high speed fluctuation ends. As a result, at the start of fluctuation, the third symbol is scrolled one frame at a time without any discomfort from the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation, and when the high speed fluctuation display is switched to the low speed fluctuation display, based on the stop symbol determination flag determined by this fluctuation Thus, the symbols can be offset by the offset information and displayed in a variable manner, and the symbols can be naturally stopped and displayed with the correct stop symbols.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2456 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2458). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table set by the process of S2456 is turned on, and other display data tables The data table discrimination flag corresponding to is set to OFF (S2459). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2303, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can do.

Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2456, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2460), and the pointer 233f is set. Is initialized to 0 (S2461). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2462).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the display setting process 4 (S2750) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 4 (S2750). In the display setting process 4 (FIG. 91, S2750) in the eighth embodiment, the process of S3015 is deleted from the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the first embodiment. For other processing, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

As described above, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the stop symbol determination flag is copied, and the previous stop symbol is determined and the variation of the symbol is determined without executing the process of holding it during the next variation. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the conversation notice. Therefore, the process when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 stops and displays the third symbol can be simplified. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114, and when the command is received by the display controller 114, the display controller 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. Then, after that, the display control device 114 may be configured to transmit a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, is in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, in use). ) And) may be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted/received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted/received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and from the state of the signal, the resident signal is used. It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts or ends the access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, whether the scanning is in the blank period, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237, or a notification from the image controller 237. If the scanning state is in the blank period, the video RAMs 235 and 236 may be determined to be unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be performed easily.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data that is not Null data to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information, and the process of transferring to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the drawing of that sprite The image data that is not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing or the V interrupt processing, and Can perform the transfer process of.

In the above-described embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed to the image controller 237, but simply by specifying the address, the address can be specified. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM are designated from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. It may be directly connected to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input/output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by being connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Good.

By providing the bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 and the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. May be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, an image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first provides the area after the system reset is released. It is also possible to store a part of the boot program that is executed by the. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after system reset is released. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) is provided with the first program storage area 234d1, and a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) may be used as a memory constituted by a nonvolatile storage medium capable of reading at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. Alternatively, the memory may be provided with a first program storage area in which a part of the boot program first executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided on the MPU 231. In, a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, a case has been described in which the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can

When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated on the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is specified, and thus the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. As a result, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by being connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an internal bus (bus It may be directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is configured by a 1-port type (1 input/output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-port type is also possible. Type RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, while reading image data from the normal video RAM 236 and drawing an image, the data is read from the character ROM 234. The processing of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drawing process from being delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The contents may be divided and the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the I/O port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by the read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multi-port RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. It is preferably resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by the drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten during power-on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 is not necessarily limited thereto. Based on a command received from the third symbol display device 81, when the image to be displayed is greatly different, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger. Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when the other resident images are updated, and is retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated. You can leave it. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly made resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period in which the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may do so.

Further, when the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is first displayed using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is stored is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, before starting transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, and therefore the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, the image data may be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If so, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for restoration from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a whose reading speed is slow, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary blackout or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen included in the third symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) in which scanning is performed on the blank region which is the scanning region other than the display region in which the actual image is displayed, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be shortened because the processing can be performed by

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image. can do. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are turned on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area. Although the case of transferring to the 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 while the character ROM 234 is being displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used for power-on. When the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image, The image data to be made resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and stored in the normal video RAM 236. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read from the memory, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. The case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the presentation mode of the back image and the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear face image and the effect mode of super reach according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed presentation mode is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is defined. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, by transmitting an error command to the display control device 114, The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110, The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main control device 110 may transmit an error command for notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command to the display control device 114 to notify the error. May be.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When the vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 38) by turning on the error occurrence flag and further turning on the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error. When it is determined that the warning image is set, the warning image setting process (see FIG. 39) may be executed to immediately display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor. Good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like and to intentionally enter the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main controller 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is output. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. In addition to turning on the error occurrence flag, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay is shown in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that an illegal action is given to the player. Can be deterred.

When the drawing content necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 Corresponding to an address in which the time (20 msec in the present embodiment) for displaying an image for a frame is defined as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed and the sprite after the change in the sprite. The color information specifying the color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone of the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is made to correspond to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added to each address in association with identification information (“additional presentation 1”, “additional presentation 2”,...) For identifying the additional displayable production. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before using the image data according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player is selected. Although the case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is specified was explained, the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, the additional data table may define not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Therefore, from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the display control device 114 describes the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation effect is A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "advance notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After specifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified variation effect are combined into one, and the final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame at which the drawing process ends will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. Alternatively, the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer where the drawn image should be developed and the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

In the above-described embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d and before the finalized display effect is completed, the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect in the display data table buffer 233d Although described, this may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d as the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect. Further, in this case, the fixed display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113. The confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d each time the display ends. As a result, it is possible to continue to display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect is described as a case where the rear image is changed and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a rear image that is completely different from the third symbol or the rear image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on after the transfer is completed on the third symbol display device 81, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, first, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power is turned on. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be used in the operation check of the player, the hall personnel, or the factory at the time of manufacturing. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variable display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image stored in the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is preferably transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the variable display by the power-on fluctuation image.

In the above-described embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time in which 20 milliseconds is defined as one unit, and the contents of the image to be drawn (drawing contents) at that time and the contents to be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be defined at a predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, if the third symbol display device 81 is to display an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content at every 1/30 second interval.

Further, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred, and refers to the predetermined image data. May be already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of the predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is also stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It has been described that the MPU 231 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 and does not execute the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to check whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. May be stored. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if the MPU 231 needs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 stores the image data in the normal video RAM 236 regardless of the storage state of the image data. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” of the plurality of rear images is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times that the

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer command of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 causes the transfer command to be transferred at the predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case has been described where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the head of the display data table. The information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is configured to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the head of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally output from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to be transferred to the dedicated video RAM 236.

In the above-described embodiment, when performing the variation effect, a case has been described in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed at a high-speed variation in which they are scrolled at a high speed such that the player cannot see them, but instead of displaying this high-speed variation. , All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise image y image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. ..

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 performs the main control of the reserved ball number command each time the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). The case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c in the main controller 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first entrance 64 and the passage of the second entrance 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times each, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be held for variable display based on winning in the first ball entrance 64 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four is the number of balls to be held. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the vertical The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes the presentation display that is said. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Further, the present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is not provided. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Further, some or all of the above-described respective embodiments and modified examples may be combined and implemented.

Below, in addition to the game machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group>
Based on the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the game success/failure determination result consisting of at least a plurality of symbols, the display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means, and the game success/failure determination result being a hit. Then, as the identification information indicating the hit, a stop symbol determination means for displaying the same symbol on the display control means, and a dynamic display start of the identification information, and then stop at the identification information indicating the result of the judgment. By the time it is displayed, the reach display mode in which the other symbol rows except the one symbol row are displayed with the same symbol among the plurality of symbol rows and the non-reach display aspect different from the reach display aspect In the non-reach display mode, the symbol display control means to be displayed by and the non-reach display mode are displayed by the symbol display control means, and based on the symbols displayed in one of the non-reach display modes, and others. When the contents of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means and the effect display means for displaying the related specific effect display with the one based on the symbols displayed in the symbol column satisfy the predetermined condition, A gaming machine A1 comprising: a privilege giving means for displaying the reach display mode by the symbol display control means.

According to the gaming machine A1, the display means displays the identification information indicating the result of the game determination, which is composed of at least a plurality of symbol strings. The identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Based on the fact that the hit/no hit determination result of the game is a hit, the stop symbol determination means causes the display control means to display the same symbol as the identification information indicating the hit. After starting the dynamic display of the identification information, until the stop display with the identification information indicating the result of the hit determination, among the plurality of symbol rows, other than the one symbol row, the other symbol rows are the same symbol. The reach display mode to be displayed and a non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode are displayed by the symbol display control means. Displayed in a combination of non-reach display modes by the symbol display control means, among the non-reach display modes, those based on the symbols displayed in one symbol row and those based on the symbols displayed in other symbol rows The specific effect display related with and is displayed by the effect display means. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach display mode is displayed by the privilege giving means by the symbol display control means. As a result, even when the non-reach display mode is displayed, the specific effect display satisfying the predetermined condition is displayed, so that it is possible to have an expectation for a big hit. Therefore, the player can expect to win the jackpot and play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A1, the specific effect display satisfies the first condition with the first specific effect and the first specific effect that are displayed in relation to the symbols displayed in the one symbol row and the other symbol row. And at least the second specific effect displayed in relation to the first specific effect, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the second condition is satisfied in the second specific effect. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first condition is satisfied in the first specific effect and the first specific effect that are displayed in relation to the symbols stopped and displayed in one symbol row and the other symbol row, in the first specific effect At least the specific effect is configured with the second specific effect that is displayed in relation to each other. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the second condition is satisfied in the second specific effect. As a result, since a plurality of conditions are satisfied and the reach display mode is displayed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be gradually increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by the specific effect.

In the gaming machine A2, the symbols displayed in the one symbol row and the other symbol rows are each constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol, and the first specific effect of the specific effect display is The comments are displayed respectively from the design picture displayed in the one design row and the design picture displayed in the other design row, and when the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination, A gaming machine A3, characterized in that the first condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, one symbol row and another symbol row are each configured by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol. A comment is displayed respectively from the design picture displayed in one design row and the design picture displayed in another design row, and when the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination, the first The first specific effect of the specific effect display is configured so that the condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the first condition is satisfied by combining the comments. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

In the gaming machine A2, the one symbol row and the other symbol row are each configured by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol, and the second specific effect of the specific effect display is the one symbol row. The attainment dynamic display mode satisfying the second condition and the non-attainment dynamic display not satisfying the second condition, in which the design of the pattern displayed on the screen and the design of the design displayed on the other design sequence are respectively displayed At least one of the modes is displayed, and the gaming machine A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, one symbol row and another symbol row are each configured by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol. The design of the design that is stopped and displayed in one design row and the design of the design that is stopped and displayed in the other design row are respectively displayed. Achievement of the second condition. Dynamic display mode and non-achievement that does not meet the second condition. At least one of the dynamic display mode is displayed in the second specific effect of the specific effect display. As a result, even if the second specific effect is performed, the symbols of the stopped symbols are also displayed, so that the player can be easily informed that the lottery game is still in progress. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the display control means dynamically displays the plurality of symbol rows by scrolling in a predetermined direction, and the symbols are displayed in the non-reach display mode by the symbol display control means. The gaming machine A5 is characterized by scrolling and dynamically displaying the symbol rows other than those displayed in the non-reach display mode while being displayed.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effect is achieved. That is, a plurality of symbol strings are dynamically displayed by being scroll-displayed in a predetermined direction by the display control means. Even while being displayed in the non-reach display mode by the symbol display control means, the symbol rows other than those displayed in the non-reach display mode are scroll-displayed and dynamically displayed by the display control means. Thereby, even when the specific effect display is displayed, the player can easily identify that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

<Feature B group>
It has a main control means for executing the control of the game and a sub control means for receiving the control signal from the main control means to execute the control of the game, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the start condition. A win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination, and a win/loss determination signal generating means for generating a win/loss determination signal indicating a win/loss determination result by the win/loss determination means, and outputting the win/loss determination signal to the slave control means, The sub-control means, a display means for displaying identification information for notifying a win/fail judgment result based on the win/no judgment signal composed of at least a plurality of symbol arrays, and a display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means. , A stop symbol determination means for determining a symbol for stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol rows as the identification information indicating the determination result based on the determination signal, and a lottery game based on establishment of a lottery condition. In the gaming machine in which is executed, the sub-control means displays a specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed immediately before on the display means based on the start of the next lottery game. A game having an effect display means and a privilege effect display means for displaying a privilege effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine B1.

According to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means for executing the game control, the win/no judgment is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the start condition. A win/loss determination signal indicating the win/loss determination result by the win/loss determination means is generated by the win/loss determination signal generation means, and is output to the slave control means that controls the game in accordance with the control signal output from the main control means. In the sub-control unit, the display unit displays the identification information for notifying the result of the hit determination based on the hit determination signal including at least a plurality of symbol strings. The identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. The symbols for stopping and displaying a plurality of symbol rows are determined by the stop symbol determination means as identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination signal. The specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed one before is displayed on the display means by the effect display means based on the start of the next lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the privilege effect display means displays the privilege effect. As a result, the specific effect display related to the stop design of the previous lottery game is displayed, so that the two lottery games can be shown to the player like one lottery game. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the privilege effect is displayed, so that the player can enjoy the game more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine B1, the secondary control means has a stop symbol determination means for determining the stop symbol of the previous lottery game, and the effect display means of the secondary control means is predetermined by the stop symbol determination means. The gaming machine B2, which displays the specific effect display based on the determination that it is the stopped design.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the secondary control means, the stop symbol of the previous lottery game is discriminated by the stop symbol discriminating means. The specific effect display is displayed by the effect display means based on the stop symbol determining means determining that the stop symbol is the predetermined stop symbol. As a result, there is an effect that the trigger for displaying the specific effect can be made random, and a fresh taste can be provided by executing the specific effect.

In the gaming machine B1, the main control means obtains the winning/losing determination information, which is determined by the winning/losing determination means based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the winning/failing determination information obtained by the obtaining means. Storage means for storing until a condition is satisfied, pre-judgment means for judging a win/fail judgment result based on win/loss judgment information stored in the storage means, before the lottery condition is satisfied, and the identification information. A dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying on the display means, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining one of the plurality of dynamic display modes based on the result of the judgment, and a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode. Based on the discrimination information discriminated by the pre-determination means, before the lottery conditions are established, the pre-dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, and its pre-determination A prior signal generating means for generating a prior signal indicating a discrimination result between the dynamic display mode discriminating means and the preliminary discriminating means and outputting it to the slave control means. In the mode, a predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set, the effect display means of the sub-control means, when it is determined that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the advance signal, A gaming machine B3, characterized in that the specific effect display is displayed in association with a stop design of the lottery game one before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the acquisition means acquires the win/fail judgment information which is judged by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the start condition. The win/no judgment information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means until the lottery conditions are satisfied. Based on the win/loss determination information stored in the storage unit, the win/loss determination result is determined by the pre-determination unit before the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination whether one of the dynamic display modes is the dynamic display mode. Based on the determination information determined by the pre-determination means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determination means before the lottery conditions are satisfied. A preliminary signal indicating the discrimination result between the preliminary dynamic display mode discrimination means and the preliminary discrimination means is generated by the preliminary signal generation means and output to the slave control means. A predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set to the plurality of dynamic display modes. In the sub-control means, when it is determined that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the advance signal, it is related to the stop symbol of the lottery game one before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Then, the specific display effect is displayed by the effect display means. Thereby, when the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific effect display can be displayed, and as if the lottery game continues from the lottery game immediately before the specific dynamic display mode. Can be reminiscent of a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an effect that gives a novel impression.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the main control means, after the same symbol is displayed in each of the plurality of symbol strings, which is the identification information indicating that the winning/decision result is a win, the player It has a jackpot game execution means for giving a benefit that is advantageous to, the sub-control means, after the dynamic display start of the plurality of symbol rows, until the stop display by the identification information indicating the result of the win or fail In the meantime, among the plurality of symbol rows, a symbol display control to be displayed in a reach display mode in which the other symbol rows excluding one symbol row are displayed in the same symbol and a non-reach display mode different from the reach symbol display mode A bonus effect display means of the sub-control means for displaying the privilege effect for notifying the player in advance whether or not the reach display mode is displayed. Machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, after the same symbol is displayed in each of a plurality of symbol strings that are the identification information indicating that the hit/non-judgment result is a win, the bonus which is advantageous to the player is given by the jackpot game executing means. To be done. In the sub-control means, after starting dynamic display of a plurality of symbol rows, until one of the plurality of symbol rows is stopped and displayed until it is stopped and displayed with the identification information indicating the result of judgment, other symbol rows The symbol display control means displays the reach display mode in which the same symbol display is displayed and the non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode. The privilege effect display means displays a privilege effect that informs the player in advance whether or not the reach display mode is displayed. As a result, by displaying the special effect, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the special effect is displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the symbols forming the plurality of symbol rows are respectively constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol, and the specific effect display is one symbol of the stop symbols. The comments are displayed respectively from the symbols of the symbols stopped and displayed in the columns and the symbols of the symbols stopped and displayed in the other symbols, and the predetermined condition is given when the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that the above is established.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, each of the symbols forming the plurality of symbol rows is constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol. In the case of the stopped symbols, the comment of the symbol that is stopped and displayed in one symbol column and the symbol of the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the other symbol column are respectively displayed, and the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination The specific effect display is configured so that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the first condition is satisfied by combining the comments. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

<Characteristic C group>
The winning/non-judgment means for judging whether or not the game is won, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the win/no decision by the win/no judgment means, the display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification information A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed on the display means, and when the display device displays identification information indicating that the win/fail judgment result is a hit, the player In the gaming machine in which the privilege game that is advantageous to the start is started, the display means displays the identification information dynamically in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means By the time the identification information showing the determination result is stopped and displayed, auxiliary information display means for displaying information relating to the game separately from the identification information is provided, and the plurality of instruction symbols are displayed on the display means. It has an instruction pattern display means for displaying, and an auxiliary display mode control means for displaying a display mode related to one of the instruction patterns displayed by the instruction pattern display means on the auxiliary information display means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C1, the success or failure of the game is determined by the success/failure determination means. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment unit. The identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display mode determining means determines a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. When the display unit displays the identification information indicating that the result of the hit determination is a hit, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is started. Information related to the game from the time when the identification information is dynamically displayed in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means until the identification information indicating the win/fail judgment result is stopped and displayed. Is displayed on the display means separately from the identification information. The instruction symbol indicating each of the plurality of display modes is displayed on the display unit by the instruction symbol display unit. Of the instruction symbols displayed by the instruction symbol display means, the display mode relating to one instruction symbol is displayed on the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means. This allows the player to pay attention to the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means, and the interest of the game can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine C1, the instruction symbol to be displayed on the instruction symbol display means, the instruction symbol determination means for determining two or more of the instruction symbols from the plurality of instruction symbols based on the result of the judgment, and the instruction symbol determination. From among the two or more instruction symbols determined by the means, based on the result of the hit determination, the auxiliary display mode control means displays the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in a display mode related to the instruction pattern. A game machine C2, comprising: a display instruction symbol determining means for determining the instruction symbol.

The gaming machine C2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, two or more instruction symbols from among the plurality of instruction symbols to be displayed on the instruction symbol display means are determined by the instruction symbol determination means on the basis of the result of the judgment. From the two or more instruction symbols determined by the instruction symbol determination means, an instruction to display the display mode of the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means in the display mode related to the instruction pattern based on the result of the judgment. The symbol is determined by the display instruction symbol determination means. As a result, two or more instruction symbols are determined based on the result of hit determination, so that the player can infer the result of hit determination depending on the type of instruction symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, by displaying the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in a display mode related to the instruction pattern determined based on the win/loss judgment result, the player can predict a more detailed win/loss judgment result. is there.

In the gaming machine C1, the auxiliary display mode control means determines the instruction pattern to be displayed in the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in the display mode related to the instruction pattern, based on the result of judgment of success or failure from the plurality of instruction patterns. First instruction symbol determination means, based on the result of the determination of the validity of the instruction symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means other than the instruction symbol determined by the first instruction symbol determination means from among the plurality of instruction symbols A second instruction symbol determining means for determining, and a gaming machine C3 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. In other words, the first instruction symbol determining means determines the instruction symbol displayed by the auxiliary display aspect control device in the display mode of the auxiliary information display device in the display mode related to the instruction symbol, based on the hit/miss judgment result from a plurality of instruction symbols. .. The instruction symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means other than the instruction symbol determined by the first instruction symbol determination means is determined by the second instruction symbol determination means on the basis of the result of the hit determination from a plurality of instruction symbols. As a result, the player can predict the win/fail judgment result from the type of the instruction symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be more enjoyed and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machine is characterized by having a display position determining means for determining a display position of each of the instruction symbols displayed on the auxiliary information display means by a predetermined lottery control. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the display position of each instruction symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means is determined by the display position determination means by a predetermined lottery control, so that the instruction symbol is displayed. There is an effect that the position becomes more random and the player can be given a fresh taste.

<Feature D group>
It has a main control means for executing the control of the game and a sub control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the starting condition, And a hit-or-miss judgment signal generating means for generating a hit-or-miss judgment signal indicating a hit-or-miss judgment result by the hit-or-miss judgment means, and the sub-control means is provided from the main control means. Of display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination signal, and display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, based on the establishment of the start condition. In the gaming machine in which the lottery game is performed by starting the dynamic display of the identification information, the main control means, to the sub-control means, an identification signal for displaying the identification information indicating the win/fail judgment result. The sub-control means, based on the identification signal, the identification information determining means for determining the identification information indicating the hit/miss determination result, and the identification information determining means. And a storage unit for storing identification information indicating the determined hit/miss determination result, and the display control unit of the sub-control unit, when starting a new lottery game, based on the establishment of the start condition. Is based on the previous identification information discriminating means for discriminating the identification information indicating the hit determination result displayed in the lottery game immediately before the new lottery game, and the identification information discriminated by the previous identification information discriminating means. Then, initial dynamic display setting means for executing a setting for starting the dynamic display of the identification information of the new lottery game from the identification information, and the identification information after the initial dynamic display setting means makes the setting The storage unit overwrites the identification information indicating the result of the determination of the new lottery game determined by the determination unit with the identification information indicating the result of the determination of the previous lottery game stored in the storage unit. Dynamic display for stopping the dynamic display at the timing when the identification information of the new lottery game determined by the storage control means stored in the storage means and the identification information determination means stored in the storage means is dynamically displayed. A game machine D1 characterized by having stop means.

According to the gaming machine D1, game control is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the game success/failure determination is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. The hit/miss judgment signal generating means generates a hit/miss judgment signal indicating the hit/miss judgment result by the hit/miss judgment means. In the slave control means, the display means displays the identification information indicating the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the hit/miss judgment signal from the main controller. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the dynamic display of the identification information is started and the lottery game is performed. In the main control means, the identification signal generating means generates and outputs an identification signal for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the hit determination to the sub control means. In the slave control means, the identification information indicating the hit/miss judgment result is determined by the identification information determining means based on the identification signal. The storage unit stores the identification information indicating the result of the determination whether or not the identification information determination unit has determined. In the display control means of the sub-control means, when a new lottery game is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition of the sub-control means, the result displayed in the lottery game immediately before the new lottery game is displayed. The identification information indicating the determination result is determined by the previous identification information determination means. Based on the identification information determined by the identification information determination means last time, the initial dynamic display setting means performs a setting for starting the dynamic display of the identification information of the new lottery game from the identification information. After the setting of the initial dynamic display setting means, the identification information indicating the result of the determination result of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determination means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means, and the previous lottery game is stored. The identification information indicating the result of the judgment is overwritten and stored in the storage means. The dynamic display stop means executes the stop of the dynamic display at the timing at which the new lottery game identification information determined by the identification information determination means stored in the storage means is dynamically displayed. Thereby, it is not necessary to store both the new lottery game and the immediately preceding lottery game with respect to the identification information indicating the result of the judgment, and to reduce the amount of data stored in the storage area of the storage means. You can Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the data amount of the storage unit.

In the gaming machine D1, the sub-control means displays a specific effect display related to the identification information determined by the identification information determination means last time on the display means based on the start of the next new lottery game. A game having an effect display means and a privilege effect display means for displaying a privilege effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1. That is, in the sub-control unit, the specific effect display related to the identification information determined by the identification information determination unit last time is displayed on the display unit by the effect display unit based on the start of the next new lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the privilege effect display means displays the privilege effect. As a result, the specific effect related to the identification information displayed in the previous lottery game is displayed based on the start of the new lottery game, so that it appears as if the dynamic display of the identification information continues. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make two lottery games look like one lottery game.

In gaming machine D2,
The effect display means displays the specific effect display when the identification information determined by the identification information determination means last time is predetermined identification information determined in advance. Machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, when the identification information previously discriminated by the identification information discriminating means is predetermined identification information, a specific effect display is produced by the effect display means. Since it is displayed, the specific effect display is displayed at random occasions, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a fresh effect.

<Feature E>
A win/fail judgment means for executing a win/no judgment of the game,
Display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
Display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means,
Dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying the identification information,
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player,
The plurality of dynamic display modes include a specific dynamic display mode preset to display the first specific effect display and the second specific effect display,
Based on the player operating the operating means within the display period of the first specific effect display, the display period of the first specific effect display is extended while the display period of the first specific effect display is being increased. A first specific effect adjusting means for shortening the display period of the first specific effect display based on the fact that the operating means has not been operated by the player for a predetermined time.
When the display period of the first specific effect display is extended by the first specific effect adjusting unit, the display period of the second specific effect display is shortened, while the first specific effect adjusting unit controls the first period by the first specific effect adjusting unit. A game machine E1 comprising: a second specific effect adjusting means for extending the display period of the second specific effect display when the display period of the specific effect display is shortened.

According to the gaming machine E1, whether or not the game is won is executed by the win/loss determination means. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment unit. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode among a plurality of dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying the identification information. The plurality of dynamic display modes include a specific dynamic display mode in which it is preset to display the first specific performance display and the second specific performance display. The display period of the first specific effect display is extended by the first specific effect adjusting means based on the player operating the operation means within the display period of the first specific effect display. Further, the display period of the first specific effect display is shortened by the first specific effect adjusting means based on the fact that the operating means is not operated by the player for a predetermined time within the display period of the first specific effect display. It When the display period of the first specific effect display is extended by the first specific effect adjusting unit, the display period of the second specific effect display is shortened by the second specific effect adjusting unit. Moreover, when the display period of the first specific effect display is shortened by the first specific effect adjusting unit, the display period of the second specific effect display is extended by the second specific effect adjusting unit. Thereby, the production time can be adjusted as the player intends while suppressing the change in the display period in which the first specific production and the second specific production are combined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an effect more suited to the player.

The gaming machine Z1 wherein each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through a winning opening), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in association with a winning game ball at a starting opening and displays a variation effect and a jackpot effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. ..
In such a pachinko machine, a game machine has been proposed in which a notice effect related to the game is executed for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-279560).
With regard to this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine with a further interest in the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game and prevents the player from getting tired of the game early. The purpose is to
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a main control means for executing the control of the game, a slave control means for receiving the control signal from the main control means and executing the control of the game, The main control means, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the hit determination means for performing the hit determination, and the hit determination signal indicating the hit determination result by the hit determination means, to generate the hit control signal to the slave control means. And a win/loss determination signal generating means for outputting to the display means, wherein the sub-control means displays the identification information for notifying the win/loss determination result based on the win/loss determination signal composed of at least a plurality of symbol strings. Display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means, and stop symbol determination means for determining a symbol for stop display of the plurality of symbol rows as the identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination signal. With, and based on the satisfaction of the lottery conditions, a lottery game is executed, the sub-control means displays a specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed immediately before the next lottery. An effect display means for displaying on the display means based on the start of the game, and a privilege effect display means for displaying a privilege effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition. , With.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the sub-control means has a stop symbol determination means for determining the stop symbol of the previous lottery game, and the sub-control The effect display means of the means displays the specific effect display based on the fact that the stop symbol determination means determines that the stop symbol is a predetermined stop symbol.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the main control means obtains the hit/miss determination information which is determined by the hit/miss determination means based on the satisfaction of the start condition. Based on the means and the win/loss determination information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery conditions are met, and based on the win/loss determination information stored in the storage means, before the lottery conditions are met. A pre-determination unit that determines a win/fail determination result, and a dynamic display mode that dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit, based on the win/fail determination result, one of the dynamic display modes. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode and dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means before the lottery condition is satisfied, based on the discrimination information determined by the pre-determination means. A pre-dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, and a pre-signal for generating a pre-signal indicating the discrimination result between the pre-dynamic display mode determining means and the pre-determining means and outputting the pre-signal to the slave control means A predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set to the plurality of dynamic display modes, and the effect display means of the sub-control means is configured to operate in accordance with the advance signal. When it is determined that the specific dynamic display mode is determined, the specific effect display is associated with the stop design of the lottery game one before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. It is something to display.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the main control means for controlling the game, the win/no judgment is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the start condition. A win/loss determination signal indicating the win/loss determination result by the win/loss determination means is generated by the win/loss determination signal generation means, and is output to the slave control means that controls the game in accordance with the control signal output from the main control means.
In the sub-control unit, the display unit displays the identification information for notifying the result of the hit determination based on the hit determination signal including at least a plurality of symbol strings. The identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. The symbols for stopping and displaying a plurality of symbol rows are determined by the stop symbol determination means as identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination signal. The specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed one before is displayed on the display means by the effect display means based on the start of the next lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the privilege effect display means displays the privilege effect.
As a result, the specific effect display related to the stop design of the previous lottery game is displayed, so that the two lottery games can be shown to the player like one lottery game. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the privilege effect is displayed, so that the player can enjoy the game more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the secondary control means, the stop symbol of the previous lottery game is discriminated by the stop symbol discriminating means. The specific effect display is displayed by the effect display means based on the stop symbol determining means determining that the stop symbol is the predetermined stop symbol.
As a result, there is an effect that the trigger for displaying the specific effect can be made random, and a fresh taste can be provided by executing the specific effect.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, the acquisition means acquires the win/fail judgment information which is judged by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the start condition. The win/no judgment information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means until the lottery conditions are satisfied. Based on the win/loss determination information stored in the storage unit, the win/loss determination result is determined by the pre-determination unit before the lottery condition is satisfied.
The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the result of the determination whether one of the dynamic display modes is the dynamic display mode. Based on the determination information determined by the pre-determination means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determination means before the lottery conditions are satisfied. A preliminary signal indicating the discrimination result between the preliminary dynamic display mode discrimination means and the preliminary discrimination means is generated by the preliminary signal generation means and output to the slave control means.
A predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set to the plurality of dynamic display modes. In the sub-control means, when it is determined that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the advance signal, it is related to the stop symbol of the lottery game one before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Then, the specific display effect is displayed by the effect display means.
Thereby, when the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific effect display can be displayed, and as if the lottery game continues from the lottery game immediately before the specific dynamic display mode. Can be reminiscent of a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an effect that gives a novel impression.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means )
114 display control unit (Table示制part of control means)
S306-size constant means
S402 obtaining unit S406 memory means S407 advance determination hand stage S409 advance dynamic display form determining means
S1504 Dynamic display mode determination means
S2103 Part of display control means
S2207 S2209 effect display means a portion of the stop symbol determination means, part of the benefits demonstration execution means

Claims (1)

Determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition,
Display means for displaying identification information consisting of at least a plurality of symbol strings for notifying the determination result by the determination means,
Stop symbol determination means for determining symbols to be stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of symbol rows as the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means,
In the gaming machine having a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and then performing a stop display with the symbol determined by the stop symbol determination means,
An acquisition unit that acquires the determination information that is determined by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition;
Storage means for storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination condition is satisfied;
Based on the determination information stored in the storage means, prior determination means for determining the determination result before the determination condition is satisfied,
As a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes based on the determination result,
Based on the discrimination information discriminated by the pre-determination means, before the determination condition is satisfied, a pre-dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means,
Effect display means for causing the display means to display a specific effect display related to a stop symbol after the dynamic display executed one before, based on the start of the next dynamic display,
When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, a privilege effect executing means for executing a privilege effect, and
A predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set to the plurality of dynamic display modes,
When the effect display unit determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination unit, the performance display unit is 1 more than the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. der which displays the specific effect display associated with previous dynamic display after the stop symbols one is,
The specific effect display, after the dynamic display executed one before, even after the start period of the dynamic display of the next identification information, the stop pattern of the dynamic display executed one before A game machine characterized by being executed in a state where a stop is maintained .

Images